JP2020108522A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress the deterioration of interest in a game state susceptible to being monotonized.SOLUTION: When a game ball passes through a first special start area, a first special lottery is carried out. When a game ball passes through a second special start area, a second special lottery including a small winning in a lottery result is carried out. When a normal winning is derived, passing of a game ball to the second special start area becomes easier. The second special lottery is not carried out, even when a game ball passes through the second special start area in a variation of a first special drawing pattern, and is carried out, when a game ball passes through the second special start area in a state in which the first special drawing pattern is not varied. A table used in determining a variation pattern of the first special drawing pattern includes a normal table having a relatively small expectation value for generation of a specific period, in which the first special pattern is not varied, of a period in which passing of a game ball to the second special start area is easy, and a specific table having a relatively large expectation. The variation pattern of the first special drawing pattern is determined using the specific table, when a specific condition is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 123

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a big hit determination is made when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and when a result of the big hit is displayed, a big hit game state which is advantageous to a player is controlled.

In this type of gaming machine, the normal gaming state tends to be monotonous until it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Further, even if the big hit game state is controlled, if the big hit game state ends, a monotonous game has to be performed again, which may reduce the interest.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, apart from the big hit game state, there has been known a game machine that shifts to a game state advantageous to a player. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the round 2 big hit game state ends, the state shifts to a high-accuracy time-short state, and when a predetermined number of fluctuations elapses in the high-precision time-short state, the time-shortage state ends, and a small hit game is easily executed A gaming machine adapted to shift to an uncertain time saving state is disclosed.

JP, 2016-174800, A

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, after the 2-round big hit game state ends, by shifting to the high-probability non-time saving game state in which the small hit game is likely to be executed, the interest is enhanced even after the big hit game state ends. Although it is possible, as long as it is not controlled to the big hit game state, it is not shifted to the highly accurate non-time saving game state, so that the normal game state until the big hit game state is controlled tends to be monotonous.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest in a gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determinable using the specific table based on the satisfaction of a specific condition.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is included in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) having a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period (for example, a period for which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) that does not occur and a specific period (for example, , And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) having an expected value larger than that of the normal table during which the second start opening winning is determined) is included. Then, the specific condition is established, the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is performed, and if the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the game ball to the specific winning area It becomes easier to pass through and the prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value that occurs) becomes larger than the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the game ball moves the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) during the specific period. If the result of the second special lottery after passing is the specific result (for example, a small hit), it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded. Become. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed. The second special lottery can be performed only when the player has passed, and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

(4) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch) through which a game ball that has been launched can pass,
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on that the game ball has passed through the first special start area. )When,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means (eg, the main CPU 101) that can derive the result of the first special lottery as the result of the game When,
A second special starting area (for example, a second starting opening switch) through which a game ball that has been launched can pass,
Second special lottery means capable of performing a second special lottery having a specific result with a higher probability than the first special lottery, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area,
Variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol variable control means (eg, the main CPU 101) that can derive the result of the second special lottery as the result of the game When,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables. ,
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
A first table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively small,
A second table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively large,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol, the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the specific result. It is characterized in that it can be changed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, based on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol The table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display is changed. Therefore, based on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery being the specific result, it is possible to change the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. Further, by setting a plurality of states in which the expected value of the prize per unit time is 1 or less, it is possible to realize a plurality of normal game states in which the expected value of the prize per unit time is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in a gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

It is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of a diagram showing an operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing an appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment as seen from diagonally right above. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display portion and a second special symbol display portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of a table showing a jackpot probability of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing another example of a variable time determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is a big hit. It is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at power-on of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game permission process of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, (a) a flowchart showing an example of a setting process, (b) a flowchart showing another example of the setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a backup clear process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a setting confirmation process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game return process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of abnormalities in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of processing at the time of a power failure occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of a starting mouth winning detection processing by a main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a setting check process by the main CPU101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of main control main processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the special design memory check processing by the main CPU of the pachinko game machine which relates to 1st execution form. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of the time saving counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big hit end interval process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a main process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a command analysis process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a command transmission process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a message setting process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a direct table registration process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a message transmission process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 9 is a table showing, for each set value, an example of the selection ratio of the limiter count in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 4 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate. In the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which a game ball passes an accessory continuous operation left gate. It is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is executed. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device, when the hole menu redisplay process of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is performed. It is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, (B) A screen indicating that an abnormal start winning prize error has occurred and backup clear processing has been executed without setting change processing, (c) Backup clear processing has been executed without setting change processing, and startup This is a screen after the notification period indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed has passed in the state where both the mouth abnormal winning awards have occurred. It is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU executes a setting determination process for determining suitability of setting value information. It is a flowchart showing an example of a hole menu process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 59 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can update a page in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen in which each history data was cleared in the setting change/confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 10 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, showing an example when “setting display” is selected. .. It is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a diagram showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. Is. FIG. 12 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, showing an example of a page update screen capable of performing page update. is there. On the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, an example of an operation procedure until the setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming the set value is displayed FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of a maintenance process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when a guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed on the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of an authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process performed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. In Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on an area|region. 9 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the entered password is inappropriate It is a figure which shows an example. It is possible to confirm the set value on the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow figure showing an example of an operation procedure until a possible setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the volume switch which generate|occur|produces the volume password applied to an authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process performed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of attestation processing in the modification 2 of setting change / confirmation history processing performed by a sub CPU of a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment. In Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on an area|region. 9 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process performed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine which constitutes the gaming system concerning the modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in a portable radio communication terminal and a server device of a game system concerning a modification 3 of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen containing a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine of the gaming system which concerns on the modified example 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flow figure showing an example of a set value confirmation procedure of setting change / confirmation history information in a game system concerning the modification 3 of a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-dimensional code display screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example of a front view of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display portion and a second special symbol display portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the buffer area which preserve|saves the starting information of main RAM in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, (A) The figure which shows the example, (B) The figure which shows another example. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is an example of a table showing a big hit probability and a small hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of a special symbol determination table in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a table for explaining an example of each gaming state in a non-specific gaming state. It is an example of a jackpot symbol determination table when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a jackpot. It is an example of a small hit symbol determination table when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a small hit. It is an example of a variation pattern table number setting table of special symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of switch input detection processing by a main CPU of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting mouth winning detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation start area check process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol variation pattern table number setting processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of the 1st special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flow chart showing an example of a big hit end interval processing by a main CPU of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a setting change process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a backup clear process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors' product and the variation time of the first special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, (a) LG state, (b) HG state, (C) The case of the RG state is shown. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, is a time chart showing another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the normal electric auditors product and the variation time of the first special symbol in each gaming state. It is a figure which shows an example of a state transition in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment.

[1. First Embodiment]
First, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described.

[1-1. Configuration of Gaming Machine of First Embodiment]
[1-1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the outer appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an example of a diagram showing the operation button group 66 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the outer appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of the game board unit 17 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7: is an example which shows the front exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit 17 in the pachinko game machine 1 which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the diagonally right upper direction. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 70 including the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The directions shown in the drawings are the directions in front view. Therefore, for example, “left” described in the right direction of the drawing is a rear view, and thus “right” in the drawing is “left” in a front view. Similarly, what is described as “right” in the left direction of the drawing is “right” when viewed from the front, for the same reason.

In the following description, the front and back sides are defined as the front side and the back side as the front side as viewed from the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface visible when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a payout unit 18, and a board unit 19 are provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame body when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with the opening 22 and the operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged above the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a device that gives a sound notification, effects, and error notification. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting unit for performing notification by light or performing an effect, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 includes a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 includes an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when referred to as the select button 664, it means the generic name of the up/down/left/right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hole menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13 and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is arranged below the glass door 13 at the lower front portion of the base door 12.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are shot from the launching device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls that are lent out and the game balls that are paid out as prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout opening 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout opening 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launching device 15 is arranged in the lower right front part of the base door 12 and in the lower right part of the dish unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). Thus, in the launching device 15, when the player operates the launching handle 32, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of special jackpot determination (hereinafter, the jackpot determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, effect identification patterns (decorative patterns), effect images according to the result of the big hit determination, effect images during the big hit, and demonstration effect images. Includes the number of pending display of variable display (variable display) of special symbols. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

In the first embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. May be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). Sub control board 40 having, a payout/launch control board 50 having a payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 supplying power (later described). 9)), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9, which will be described later).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the first embodiment) in which various data relating to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value decreases, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

In the main board case that accommodates the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing a set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both of which are shown in FIG. 9 described later) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data and set values, which will be described later, for example. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case, in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “game machine manager”). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than the above) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The term "inside the main board case" means that the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding positions of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are cut. When there is a gap and the backside is exposed by rotating the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine management manager, the gaming machine management is performed. It also includes one that allows the responsible person to access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can roll down is formed.

As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in the transparent panel 172 in which the game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed, and approximately in the center of the game area 20. The center unit 174, the normal electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, the passage gate 49, and the back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes each accessory such as the upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Each of these prizes 1000 functions as a performance prize that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display region of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 28 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 28 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward toward the lower side of the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

The guide rail 28 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as “outer rail 28a” and “inner rail 28b”). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 28. The inner rail 28b is for guiding the shot game balls to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 28a. The inner rail 28b is arranged inside the outer rail 28a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) and is formed in an arc shape in a front view. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into right and left of the center rail 1742.

The game balls launched by the launching device 15 are divided into right and left of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to the collision with the provided game nail or the like, it flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down area of the game ball that has been fired is sorted according to the amount of operation of the firing handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the firing handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region of the center rail 1742. The hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible to be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a special winning opening switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, so that the game ball can be won (or easily) in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination made when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later. If it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is a special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74. Is displayed by the stop display mode.

In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the first embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first start opening 420 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display portion 73 described later. Is to give. A first starting port switch 421 is arranged at the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the discharge port 63. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is performed by left-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower left portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 420, for example. However, in recent years, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and it is difficult to dispose the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ordinary electric auditors product unit 400 is arranged in the lower left part of the game area 20.

The second starting opening 440 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display portion 74 described later. Is to give. A second starting port switch 441 is provided at the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are output from the payout opening 61. Is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the discharge port 63 to the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning a prize in the second starting opening 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In addition, as a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is performed by right-handing.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that is rotatable to the right, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ) Is provided. The normal electric auditors product 460 can be moved (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the starting opening solenoid 4630. Is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 or discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric auditors product 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 71 has a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition of winning (passing) the game ball. The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 491 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491. When a game ball is detected in the passage gate switch 491, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The game ball passes through the passage gate 49 by right-handing.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20. In order to arrange the attacker unit 500 in the lower right part of the game area 20, it has been required in recent years to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a special winning opening switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, so that the game ball can be won (or easily) in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). When the opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the jackpot gaming state is entered. To be done.

In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Similarly, when simply referred to as "special lottery", the hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") and the hit determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") (The same applies to the second embodiment).

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are arranged on the lower left and lower right of the game board unit 17, and when a game ball wins the general winning opening 53, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531. It When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 340, and the upper plate 26 (or the payout port 63 is moved downward through the payout opening 61). It is dispensed (discharged) to the plate 27). The general winning opening switch 531 may be provided as a switch common to a plurality of general winning openings, or each of the general winning openings can be detected so as to detect which of the plurality of general winning openings has won. It may be provided corresponding to the mouth.

In the first embodiment, the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440 have three prize balls, the general winning opening 53 has 15 prize balls, and the large winning opening 540 has 15 prize balls. It is set to each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The outlet 57 is provided separately from the outlet 450 described above, and is disposed at the center lowermost portion (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball) of the game area 20. The out port 57 is finally flown in when the launched game ball does not win in any of the starting port and the winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol holding display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, the first special It is provided with a symbol hold display section 75 and a second special symbol hold display section 76.

The normal symbol display portion 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric auditors product 460 to be in the open state according to the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is normally displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary symbol”), the combination of turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting opening The mode in which it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball in 440 is changed to a mode in which a prize is easily won.

The normal symbol hold display section 72 is for displaying the number of executions of the variable display of the held normal symbols (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number of the variable display of the normal symbols"). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the game state is determined by the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, is determined. In the first embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 440. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which it is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbols that have been held (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of holding of variable display of special symbols") It is something to display. The first special symbol reserved display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The 1st special symbol reservation display section 75 and the 2nd special symbol reservation display section 76 display the number of reservations of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a/72b of the normal symbol holding display section 72.

[1-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state. Although the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which the information of the special symbol game is stored as start memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the upper limit of the first four times The first special symbol starting storage area (4) from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the starting information, is provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the starting information, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start information, is provided.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I/O port 105 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and sends output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 sends a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 during power interruption (power OFF).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, in the main control circuit 100, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, The second special symbol hold display section 76, a starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a special winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. In addition, in the main control circuit 100, in order to send data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and the like, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a first starting opening switch 421, a second starting opening switch 441, a passage gate switch 491, a special winning opening switch 541, a general winning opening switch 531 and a performance display monitor 334. There is. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power interruption according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that triggers the execution of a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is used for changing the set value that has been set in the setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal according to a player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game balls. Further, the payout/launch control circuit 300 has a firing solenoid (not shown) according to a turning angle (amount of turning) when the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates the handle 32 in a clockwise direction. No.) is supplied with power to control the game ball to be launched.

Further, the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 24, control regarding light from the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the first embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200 while the sub control circuit 200 cannot supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sub control circuit 200 may be configured to be able to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and a command input port 208. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. The sub-control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on/off by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on/off by operating the main button 662, and select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned on/off by operation are connected. Note that actually, the select button switches 664a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively shown as a select button switch 6641 for convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as the storage means for storing the programs, tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and the storage can be read by a computer equipped with the control means. Another form may be used as long as it is a medium. For example, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used as the storage means. Further, the programs, tables, and the like are not necessarily recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs and tables may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. Although the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201 in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. A D/A converter or the like for converting as.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data relating to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing a decorative pattern, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image relating to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier (hereinafter, referred to as AMP) for amplifying a voice signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 24 to generate audio.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 stores, for each accessory, a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and an operation pattern and a lighting pattern for storing an operation pattern and a lighting pattern. And so on.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in accordance with the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory. In addition, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory.

The command input port 208 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls or rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout/launch control circuit 300 has a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330, etc. for clearing backup data at the time of power interruption according to an operation of an administrator of the game arcade are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

The power switch 35 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but instead of this, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338. Even in this case, it is preferable that the game machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed without opening the case, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the case correspond to each other. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by using a key managed by the gaming machine management officer, the back surface is exposed , The setting manager 332 can also access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the big hit game state with respect to the launch of a predetermined number (eg, 60000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 totals the base values based on the past game history, and stores the totalized result in a specific work area, which will be described later, of the work areas of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. The base values may be totaled based on a predetermined operation, or the base values may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by totaling. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 300 is a total history totalizing means for totalizing all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko game machine 1 is manufactured) to the present, It is provided with a set value-based history totalizing means for executing a total of set value-based base values based on a past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the gaming machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means performs the totalization of all the base values. All the base values totaled by the total history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history totalizing means executes the totalization of the set value-based base values. The base value-based base value totaled by the set-value-based history totalizing means is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The set value-based history totalizing means can also total only the base values for arbitrary set values in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base values for the set setting values but also the base values for other setting values other than the set setting values can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting changing process described later.

In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in accordance with an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totaled by all history totaling means and the set value base value totaled by setting value history totaling means Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list, or when displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means are used. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totalizing means and set value-based history totaling means, but in addition to these or instead of the set value-based history totaling means, from the time when the setting change processing described below is executed to the present A post-setting-change history totaling means for totaling the base values after the setting change based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by displaying all or a part of all the base values and the base value for each set value or/and the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game It is possible to easily confirm the information based on the past game history in the machine 1.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, with respect to the total payout amount of the game balls, by entering the special electric auditors (large winning hole) or the ordinary electric auditors, You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls paid out (payout by an accessory). Further, it may be a display for the total number of shots, and may further be a display for the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors product (large winning hole). Moreover, you may display them according to setting.

Further, the error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may also display a setting change code indicating that the setting change processing described later is being performed, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, the special symbol display device may display a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed.

[1-2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball receives various prizes. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol game, or when it becomes a "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, in various prizes, a special symbol starting prize which is one condition for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol game It also includes a normal symbol starting prize.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random number values (for example, a big hit determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) from various counters (for example, a big hit determination counter or a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, referring to whether or not various data such as a random number value is stored due to a special symbol starting winning, one condition that various data such as a random number value is stored is a variable display of the special symbol. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "jackpot" is performed. Then, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described jackpot determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Then, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the above-described jackpot determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern ) Is determined.

Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, The effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

Then, as a result of the determined jackpot, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a “big hit” will occur. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" is reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot gaming state, the above-mentioned various winning possibilities increase. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" is not reached, or when the big hit game state control process is finished, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed.

As the game state at the time of normal operation, for example, in the above-described big hit determination, a game state determined to be a “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as “normal game state”) or a probability determined to be a “big hit” A gaming state that increases more than the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state"), or a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning is easily obtained as a result of an ordinary hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state") ) And the like. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data extracted at the time of winning the start (random number value for jackpot determination, random for symbol determination) Are stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. Thus, storing various data (for example, a big hit determination random number value) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is called "hold", and the held various data is called start information.

That is, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and is suspended after the end of the variable display of the currently executed special symbol. The variable display of the special symbols being displayed is sequentially started. In the following, various types of data regarding special symbols that are being held are also referred to as “holding balls”.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, and maximum for each special symbol start prize. The execution of variable display of special symbols can be suspended up to four. That is, in the first embodiment, it is possible to suspend the variable display of the special symbols up to a total of 8 with the first special symbols and the second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball is won (whether or not a “big hit” is won) based on the information on the reserved ball described above, and further, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a prefetch effect function.

(2) If there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). Refer to the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. To determine.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination of whether or not the "normal hit" is performed is performed. After that, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Then, the result of the determined normal hit determination, and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "normal hit", the normal hit game control process for playing the normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the various prizes described above, particularly the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not achieved, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the "normal hit" occurs in the ordinary symbol game The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the first embodiment, as a method for extracting various random number values, a soft random number method that generates a random number value within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the method of extracting various random number values is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator that updates random numbers at a predetermined cycle, a counter (so-called ring) in the random number generator is used. A hard random number method for extracting a random number value from a counter) may be adopted as the above-described various random number value extraction method.

In the case of using the hard random number method, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[1-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG. 11 is an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 12 is a selection rate of a hit type (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”) when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example, and FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of special symbols stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms main CPU 101 and main RAM 103, which are not shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, are used, but these terms are shown in FIG.

In explaining the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 11, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), it extracts a big hit judging random number of the first special symbol from the big hit judging counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination for the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol big hit determination"). Incidentally, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, the main CPU 101, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination about the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit determination of the second special symbol") is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, like the big hit determination of the first special symbol, it is determined to be either “big hit” or “miss”. The jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”). ), the relationship between the range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination that is determined to be "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data" and "miss determination value data") Is specified.

In the first embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random numbers are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "high-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1" (time saving flag ON), and when it is "non-time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0" (time saving flag OFF). Becomes In the time saving game state, the number of time saving is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the value of the time saving counter managed by the main CPU 101 is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being judged as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (ordinary hit probability) is increased as compared with the non-time saving game state. Therefore, in the time saving game state, as compared with the non-time saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric auditors product 460 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is increased. However, in the time saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability compared to the non-time saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the variation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency of the object 460 changing from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric auditors product 460 may be changed in an opening mode to facilitate winning the ordinary electric auditors product 460. Moreover, you may combine 2 aspects or 3 aspects among said 3 aspects.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF in the normal game state, the probability variation flag ON and the time variation flag are in the probability variation short time gaming state, and the probability variation flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is in the time saving state. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to any one of the gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random number of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as starting information until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random of the second special symbol. The numerical value is held as starting information until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[1-3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value being set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low and the gaming state is low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/300 in setting 1, approximately 1/290 in setting 2, and approximately 3 in setting 3. The value is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 260/, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the high-probability game state in which the jackpot probability is relatively high (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/30 in setting 1, approximately 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3 Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the first embodiment, since the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of big hit determination value data of the first special symbol is set as a set value. Depending on the set value, the jackpot probability is changed. For example, in the low probability game state in the first special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, the number of jackpot determination value data in the high probability game state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6. Has become.

Further, also in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value that is set. When the probability of jackpot is relatively low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/190 in setting 2, and 280 in setting 3 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. When the high-probability game state is relatively high in probability of jackpot (probability change flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. 1/27, setting 4/27, setting 5/26, and setting 6/25.

That is, as for the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability game state in the second special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot determination value data in the high-probability game state, 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6 It is an individual.

In addition, the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the setting values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the first embodiment, the setting value has six levels of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be six levels, and can be arbitrarily determined as long as it has a plurality of levels.

Further, in the first embodiment, the big hit probability is different if the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of set values may have a common big hit probability. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 The setting 6 may have a common jackpot probability (a third probability higher than the second probability).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random numbers generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of this big hit determination random number that is a fixed value is set. On the other hand, by changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value, the big hit probability is made different for each set value, but the method for making the big hit probability different for each set value is not limited to this. The number of value data may be common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as a total random number may be changed according to the set value so that the big hit probability is made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, which is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2. Range 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), setting 3 is 0 to 61039 range (big hit probability is 1/280), setting 4 is range 0 to 58859 (big hit probability is 1/270) The setting 5 is a range of 0 to 56679 (the big hit probability is 1/260), the setting 6 is a range of 0 to 54499 (the big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 judges the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of the jackpot determination random number) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data). It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value, as compared with a method in which the number of pieces of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value with the range fixed.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value. Commonality is not always essential. For example, in setting 1, the number of big hit judgment value data is 218, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (big hit probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, big hit judgment value data 219, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the big hit probability is about 1/290), and in the setting 3, the number of big hit determination value data 220 pieces and the big hit determination random number The range (width) is set to a range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is a range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270), in setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260) In setting 6, the number of big hit judgment value data is 223, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (big hit probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value while setting the range of the big hit judgment random number as a fixed value In comparison, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 31) in step S72 and step S82 described later. In addition to or instead of determining whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set as the set value. It may be possible to check whether or not the range is in accordance with the above, and/or whether or not the number of pieces of big hit determination value data is the number defined by the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number or/and the number of the big hit determination value data is outside the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) In the case of NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[1-3-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, a jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the distribution of the main symbols is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 25.0%), special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 25.0%), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 25.0%), and special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 25.0%) ) One of the above. Toku-zu 1-1 is a big hit with four rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 shortened times. Special figure 1-2, round number 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started) It's a big hit. Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. Special figures 1-4 are big hits in which the number of rounds is 10, probability variation flag is ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the first special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 13 described later, and then the main symbol determined above. Execute the control to stop with.

In the first embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, the probability variation flag as in special figures 1-2 and special figures 1-4). It is a so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the high-probability game state continues until the next big-hit game state is started after the big-hit game state is finished. In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends again and the next big hit game state starts again. The high probability game state continues until it is played. And, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the high probability game state is a big hit, and if a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the first embodiment, the probability changes like the special figures 1-1 and the special figures 1-3). If it is a big hit that does not turn on the flag), after the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to a low probability game state without being controlled to a high probability game state.

When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or special figure 2-2 (sorting probability 50.0%). Toku-zu 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which time saving continues until the number of rounds 10, the probability variation flag ON, and the next big hit game state are executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the second special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 13 described later, and then the main symbol determined above. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes the control to stop the special symbol with the determined lost symbol.

Further, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. Also, if the probability variation flag is ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to a high-probability game state (a gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON), and if the probability variation flag is OFF, the jackpot gaming state. The game state after the end is controlled to a low-probability game state (a game state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the big hit of 100 times of shortening times (for example, the big hit of special figure 1-1) is called "4R normal big hit", the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the next big hit game A big hit that continues to save time until it is executed (for example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation big hit", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and a big hit of 100 times in shortening time (for example, 3, the special jackpot 2-1 jackpot) is called "10R normal jackpot", the number of rounds 10, probability variation flag ON, jackpot that continues to save time until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, bonus jackpot 1-4, The big hit of Toku-zu 2-2) is called "10R probability variation big hit".

Further, in the first embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. It may be determined whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF according to the determined main symbol.

[1-3-3. Special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, a flow until the variation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 will determine the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. The variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect contents (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the variation pattern of the determined special symbol is configured to be different according to the set value (that is, variation time and effect contents). The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the main ROM 102. Also, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may become shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 13. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol. Decide the variation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the first embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined by using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variable time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and the production selection It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probability variation short time gaming state and short time gaming state are not distinguished. Further, for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the variation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

The reach determination random number range is a random number provided for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for reach determination from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit judgment using the big hit judgment random number value when starting the variable display of the special symbol, but when the result of this big hit judgment is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed using the reach determination random number. In the first embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be appropriately changed.

For example, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is executed is 0 in the setting 1.2. -25, the settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0 to 26, and the settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0 to 27. Further, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. 2 is specified as 0-10, settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0-11, and settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0-12.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is lost, the reach effect is more likely to be executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further set. Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 3.4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of the reach effect.

In the first embodiment, when determining whether to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and common to setting 5. The setting 6 is common, but the setting is not limited to this and may be different for all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is the case where the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is loss, but when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is the big hit, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number provided for determining the variation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and extracts the selected effect. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101, in accordance with the game state and the result of determining whether to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss), the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103. Use to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In the first embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be appropriately changed. When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect, It is decided as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2, and is set to 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, is as follows. Is decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and is set to 51 to 99 in the setting 3 and 4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the probability of the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is missing and the reach effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach in time saving) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2 and 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A for shortening of working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in setting 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super reach B for time saving) is defined as 90 to 99 in common for the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the probability that the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a loss and that the reach effect is not executed The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2, and is defined as 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

Since the main symbol is decided when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is lost, what is the determination of the variation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big symbol determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 1 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in the settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and to 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a big hit, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during saving time), is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A in time saving) is defined as 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 45000 msec (super reach B for shortening of working hours) is defined as 50 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, as long as the game state, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, and the result of the decision whether to execute the reach effect are the same, The fluctuation time is more likely to be set to a shorter fluctuation time in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and is more likely to be set to a shorter fluctuation time in the settings 5 and 6 than the settings 3 and 4. .. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol is, and the variation number of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the lottery number) is increased. As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of times the big hit game state is executed when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. It becomes possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the first embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all setting values.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit judgment is a big hit is set to be common to all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured such that the fluctuation times of the above are different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents the normal medium super reach B having a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing variation time and effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, the fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[1-3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an example of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selection rate shown in FIG. 12 when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

When the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) receives the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, regardless of the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the sub CPU 201, all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) Since the distribution probability of the mode is 0%, all the decorative patterns (three decorative patterns in the first embodiment) are the same even number pattern (distribution probability 30.0%), or all The decorative pattern is determined to be the same odd number pattern (sorting probability 70.0%). In the first embodiment, the specific symbol is a "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and another symbol (for example, "V" symbol) is a specific symbol if the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with a high profit level. Also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 14 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 14, and when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, FIG. Designs other than the design shown in are determined as the stop design of the decorative design. The design other than the design shown in FIG. 14 corresponds to, for example, a design in which at least one decorative design of all decorative designs is different from other decorative designs.

Thus, according to FIG. 14, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Whether or not the result is that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 12 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3 or special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols always stop in the same even number pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first mode").

In addition, when the main symbol is special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, the first mode, or all the decorative symbols are the same odd symbol (other than the special symbol "7" symbol) (An odd number pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "second mode").

In addition, when the main design is special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, all the decorative designs are the same odd design, or all the decorative designs are the same specific design. It stops in the following manner (hereinafter referred to as "specific aspect").

Furthermore, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), it stops in the specific mode regardless of the set value. Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are both 10R probability variation big hit, but Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, so it is a big hit in the normal game state. It is highly likely that you have won. Moreover, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, it is highly possible that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time saving game state.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the 10R certainty variation jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is confirmed, and when all the decorative symbols are stopped in the same odd number pattern, the certain variation jackpot (4R probability variation) A big hit or 10R probability variation big hit) is confirmed. On the other hand, when it is stopped in the first mode, it is confirmed that the 10R certainty variation jackpot is not the largest profit degree for the player, but the possibility of the 4R certainty variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or a jackpot game. It may be notified during execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot gaming state ends. Although not adopted in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the high-probability game is a high-probability game even though the game state after the big-hit game state is a high-probability game state is controlled. You may make it control to what is called a "latent latency change state" which does not clearly show to the player that it is controlled to a state.

[1-4. Other examples of basic specifications for pachinko machines]
Note that the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment are as described above, but the basic specifications are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. Hereinafter, an example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described. However, it goes without saying that the following description is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
[1-4-1. Variation of special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a variation of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of the variable time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of special symbols to be held, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of special symbols to be held is increased. Is omitted.

In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol variation special symbol described with reference to FIG. 15, the number of lottery times that counts the number of times of variation of the special symbol (that is, the number of lottery times of the special symbol). It is provided with counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means, for example, is reset at the start of the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state ends, the counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 15, in another example, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination of whether to execute the reach effect is made. It is performed according to both the set number and the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the time when the big hit game state ends.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time point when the jackpot gaming state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect Is set to 0 to 25 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in the settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. The settings 3 and 4 are defined as 0 to 5, and the settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, the probability of executing the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as in the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of reach production is as high as 5 times (the probability of execution of reach production is as high as 10 in setting 1 and 2 as compared to setting 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the number of times the special symbol changes from the time when the big hit game state ends to 0 to 1000 times Compared with, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the variation time of the special symbol is also a big hit game. The setting difference is significant between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal reach) Is defined as 0 to 57 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation). No. 4 to No. 4 and setting Nos. 5 and 6 are 0 to 99. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normal super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in the settings 1 to 4 and not defined in the settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is defined in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-hammered situation in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach effect to be executed suggests the set value to the player. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the time point when the big hit game state ends is the starting point. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. In addition, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach effect will be executed in which the variation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol per unit, and the unit The number of fluctuations of the special symbol per time (that is, the number of lottery) is further increased. As a result, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game per unit time will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed within the unit time will be higher.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value that has been set from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect remarkably differs according to the set value, so when the so-called large summary is set, the set value set is inferred. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called large summarization occurs, the set value set for the player can be set without directly giving a loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). By giving a speculative opportunity, it becomes possible to give the player enjoyment. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect if it should be, but in the first embodiment, it is expected that the lower the frequency of the reach effect, the higher the set value will be when the so-called large summarization. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce a decrease in willingness to continue the game even if the frequency of the reach production is low.

In the first embodiment, the starting point for counting the number of changes in the special symbol is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but is not limited to this, for example, a high-probability gaming state after a predetermined period has elapsed. The starting point can be any time, such as when the high-probability game state ends in a so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time saving game state ends.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from a specific time is 1001 times or more, the reach production execution probability and the variation time of the special symbol are remarkably different according to the set value, but not necessarily. It does not have to be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as it is a feeling that the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from a specific point of time becomes equal to or more than a prescribed number, the execution probability of the reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol are significantly different according to the set value, but are set. What is significantly different depending on the value is not necessarily limited to the reach production execution probability and the variation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when it is determined that the result of the special symbol big hit lottery is a big hit and the actual big hit game state is controlled. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 is provided with a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") between the end of the big hit game state and the start of variable display of special symbols. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening performance, for example, an effect indicating that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, an effect that celebrates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a game technique in a big hit game state (for example, right hitting) Teaching effects are performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, an effect indicating the number of times the big hit game state is continued (number of consecutive games), and a high probability probability that the game state after the big hit game state ends Production that shows that the state is controlled, production that teaches the game technique in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished (for example, returning to the left), production that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And so on.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value becomes higher, the time required for the jackpot gaming state becomes higher as the set value becomes higher. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates per unit time (that is, the number of times of lottery), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected payout value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, etc.), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. Considering that there is a possibility that the set value will increase, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be set longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the expected payout value is, the higher or higher the set value, the longer the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time become, or at least one of the ending times becomes longer. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 wins the game ball into the starting opening (the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time and the big hit game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 31) in step S74 and step S82 described later is executed. When it is determined that the setting value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" in this setting check process (NO in step S721 described later), even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[1-4-2. Modified example of stop design of jackpot distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16 to FIG. 18, a first modification example and a second modification example of the jackpot distribution (selection rate of the main symbol) when the jackpot determination result of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these The stop design of the decorative design in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 17 shows the result of the special symbol big hit determination when it is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol. 18 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[1-4-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 18 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 responds to the set value with the main symbol based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R certainty variation big hits", the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. 18, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7. When the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are set, regardless of the set value, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%). ) Control to stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75). Control to stop at 0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%). Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the stop mode of the decorative symbol may be different depending on the set value even if the big hit types are the same. Become. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

[1-4-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is determined according to the main symbol that is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is not immediately determined depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol large hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, unlike the first modification, the second modification includes a positive variation attacker (not shown) inside the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, when the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is detected, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability variation attacker is detected. When the big hit game state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to a low-probability game state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability game state based on the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is a so-called "probability variation loop machine".

As shown in FIG. 17, in the second modified example, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker differs depending on the main symbol that is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is easy in which the game ball enters the probability variation attacker. Controlled by. In the first embodiment, the short-time count is 100 times when it is a big hit in the "mode where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker", and "the mode that the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker". When it is a big hit, time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the first embodiment, “a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker” is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball does not enter the probability variation attacker while being controlled to the big hit game state (approximately 100). % Is controlled to a low probability game state with a probability close to %). In addition, "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker" is a big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probability variation attacker (eg, the special winning opening 540 (see, eg, FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probability variation attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker". The big hit is called "probable variation big hit".

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker," it is controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%. Instead of being controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, it is "difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker when it is a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker". The mode may be controlled to a high-probability game state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode”.

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult and easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) having the probability variation attacker inside, the probability variation attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2 -4) is a big hit game state that opens the special winning opening 540, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1 -5, the special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-1, the special figure 2-3) When the special winning opening 540 is not opened and the other big winning openings are opened, the big hit game state is controlled, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and a mode in which the game ball does not easily enter the probability variation attacker. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and an easy mode for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker.

Further, as described above, in the case where the special winning opening 540 having the probability variation attacker inside and the other special winning opening (not shown) not having the probability variation attacker are provided, the big winning opening in the jackpot gaming state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easy to select a jackpot gaming state in which the other big winning opening is opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is more likely than other big winning opening. As the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened is easy to select, the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened can be easily selected as the setting value becomes higher.

As shown in FIG. 17, in such a second modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the set value based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of Special Figures 1-8. However, in this second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. 18, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-7. When the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are set, regardless of the set value, for example, a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 without fail. Is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%). ) Control to stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75). Control to stop at 0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when it is the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%). Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific manner regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, also in the second modified example, as in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, even if the big hit types are the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It is feasible that the stop mode of the symbols can be different. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

In each of the above-described first modified example and second modified example, by changing the selection rate of the main symbol depending on the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value. doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the set value. The stop design of the can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control of the sub CPU 201.

According to the first modified example and the second modified example described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the shortened time inrush rate. It will be possible.

[1-5. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[1-5-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a hall-related person turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). And S30) are sequentially executed. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to a power failure or an OFF operation of the power switch 35, Processing at the time of power failure occurrence described later is performed.

[1-5-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). Then, after that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices with a built-in CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process of step S20, and includes, for example, a setting key 328 for starting and ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the set value, and the like. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the setting (step S15), then performs a process of reading each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 20), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag for identifying the status when the previous power failure occurred. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change processing described later, etc., there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change processing is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure is identified. In the first embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power is cut off. On the other hand, when power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power failure occurs. In addition, the power failure status identification flag is also set to OFF when power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S722 to S727 described below. It should be noted that the power-off state identification flag is OFF when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on in the initial state or the power has not been turned on for a long time. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game during which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 if the power interruption status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and moves the game permission flag if the power interruption status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is turned off (step S1750), and the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. This check of the work area also includes a check of whether the set value data that has been set is within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in the first embodiment).

Note that the work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed and a data that is not cleared in principle even if a backup clear process described below is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set set value data, and the like are stored. It is data indicating a set value. In the first embodiment, the set value data of “0” to “5” corresponds to each of the six set values “1” to “6”. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740. If not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If so, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760) and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in the first embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is ON. Is determined. On the other hand, when the power failure occurs during the setting change process or the abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission processing is ended. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power interruptions that occur during normal games, the power interruptions that occur during the setting confirmation processing, and the power interruptions that occur during the setting change processing are referred to as normal power interruptions, and steps S722 to S727 to be described later. The power cut that occurs in is referred to as an abnormal power cut.

In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (the power switch 35 is turned on) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether the setting key switch signal is turned on. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 has been performed, that is, whether the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the last power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key 328 being turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the processing of step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission processing. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall-related person confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF. Can be understood. In the first embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key switch 328 turned ON, the game permission is given. It is possible to set the flag to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is temporarily stopped to stop the power supply, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process described below is executed. In the above description, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed, but instead of this, after performing the process of step S1810, the process returns to step S1740 to turn on the game permission flag. The process of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped until the above condition is satisfied (until YES is determined in step S1780 in FIG. 21).

[1-5-1-2. Setting process]
22A is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and the other processing (step) The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22, and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process ( The setting process ends without performing any of step S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting changing process (step S24), and the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and the setting change process (step S28). The setting process is ended without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed either.

That is, if the previous power failure was a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or during the setting confirmation processing described later, and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, then YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 changes the setting (step S24) and confirms the setting (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). Without executing any of the above, the process returns to the game return process (step S30), and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, if the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, or if the power failure occurred during the setting change process even if the last power failure was normal power failure, NO is determined in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. The setting process is terminated without performing any of the backup clear flag ON (step S28). Therefore, if an electric power interruption occurs during the setting change process or the previous power interruption is an abnormal electric power interruption, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Is determined (that is, the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are both pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and the setting is changed to a controlled state), and the set value is confirmed. Only, the setting change process (step S24) is executed and the process returns to the game return process of step S30. After the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated or only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26). ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed and the process returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return processing (step S30), abnormal time processing (see step S38 of FIG. 26 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22A, the power is turned on when the power cut occurs during the setting change process or when the previous power cut is an abnormal power cut. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 at any time, any of the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26) and the backup clear flag ON (step S28) The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22B, when an electric power interruption occurs during the setting change process and/or the previous electric power interruption is abnormal. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operating status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. You may do it. If the power is cut off during the setting change process or the previous power cut was abnormal, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on are displayed. Regardless of this, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on while forgetting to operate the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a disconnection.

Note that in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. It's finished. Similarly, also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22B, if NO is determined in step S21, setting is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. The changing process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 or/and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 is discriminated, and the setting processing is ended or the setting change processing (step S24) regardless of the discrimination result. May be executed.

[1-5-1-3. Setting change processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be ended with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 moves to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

After executing the backup clear processing of step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing between the start and end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the setting change security signal. The setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting change security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the setting value data stored in the register is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays the setting value “4” corresponding to the setting value data “3”. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set therein correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are associated with “A” to “F” respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the corresponding “D” is stored. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the setting display data stored in the register is converted into the setting value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, since the previous data is discarded, it is determined in advance. The displayed initial value (eg, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8") on the performance display monitor. You may control so that it may be displayed on 334. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the person related to the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, and the setting value stored in the register. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in step S2450. ..

In addition, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5" each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. ”(When the setting value data is “5”, the setting switch 332 is pressed to return to “0”). As a result, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically reduced from “5” to “0”, or the cyclic increase and the circulation may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. Both reduction and reduction may be performed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2480. After shifting to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is confirmed. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is fixed based on that the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is executed (YES is determined in step S2470), and the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is simply updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected to be ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 sets the settings stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal turns off.

By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup when the power is turned on after that (when the power is restored) When the setting change processing (see FIG. 23) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 22(b)) , The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed without turning the setting key 328 ON, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 sends the setting key in step S2470. Without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then OFF. The process moves to S2480 (set value is confirmed). In this case, the main CPU 101 may determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is ON and further detecting that the setting key switch signal is OFF. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal is turned ON, it is possible to determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF. In addition, in the above, when power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at power failure recovery. Although it has been described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the states of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of restoration from power failure. Also, regardless of the status of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal when power is restored, power is restored in the setting change state when power is interrupted (that is, when the power is interrupted, that state is retained and When the power is restored, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power restoration, the process of returning to the held state may be performed).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. The process ends.

It is to be noted that when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the command indicating that the setting key switch signal is turned OFF, that is, the command indicating that the setting change process has ended The initialization command will be transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

In addition, when the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is executed, a certain period after the game is started, or the game is started. At a predetermined timing after the start of, information indicating that the setting change process may have been executed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value, or the setting value has been changed in multiple steps or more (eg, setting 6 to setting 4 or more in two or more steps). Information relating to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like can be made different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or a higher setting value is set by the setting change process. It can be different when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, and it can be different when the setting value is changed in multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed in multiple steps. May be.

The above-mentioned setting change security signal output period and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. A command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, each time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and the process of step S2480 is executed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may be informed that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, and that the setting change has been completed. ..

[1-5-1-4. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process of step S2420 (see FIG. 23). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear processing, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

The main CPU 101 first determines in step S2421 whether the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred, In this backup clear processing, you may only partially clear it.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. It If it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. It should be noted that when the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission is turned off unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (see, eg, FIG. 23) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 as a command, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (see FIG. 23, for example), the main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display the setting value information in step S2450 of the setting change process. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be performed so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[1-5-1-5. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value that has been set is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the processing without executing the setting confirmation processing.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can confirm that the setting confirmation process is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the process proceeds to step S2660. Upon proceeding to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processing of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), the power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and the setting confirmation process. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process of step S26 (see FIG. 22) ends, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) ends, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

[1-5-1-6. Game return processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return processing. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), a process of returning to a state where the game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. The game return processing will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process of step S38. This abnormal time process will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32 and performs a process of validating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON. If the situation identification flag at the time of power failure is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during normal game (playing in which neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is performed) or the setting confirmation processing, and is set. It is set to OFF when power interruption occurs during the change process. Therefore, the process of step S35 is performed when the last power failure occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power interruption is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that it is the high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for restoration from power failure (power restoration command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information about the set setting value. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure is being recovered, or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clear processing is the same as the backup clear processing of step S2420 shown in FIG. 23 (backup clear processing shown in FIG. 24), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear processing of step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and initializes the work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) for RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is used as a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (the backup clear processing is also being executed) or a command indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed. Function.

In addition, the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal output period and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

[1-5-1-7. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of abnormal time processing. As described above, the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 26) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process of step S31 (see FIG. 26). Processing.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, that the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the sub CPU 201 receives the abnormal command, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send the abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when a normal command cannot be received from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may do so.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can understand that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns on when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and the power failure occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processes of steps S382 to S384 are repeated).

[1-5-1-8. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage has dropped to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs processing when a power failure occurs.

The main CPU 101 first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the main RAM 103 before the power failure is properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to hold various game data stored in the main RAM 103 even if the power supply is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 discriminates the status during power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change process, it is set to OFF.

After finishing the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop in preparation for stopping the power supply.

In this way, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and the setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process at the time of power failure occurs, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but is not updated when the power-off occurrence processing is started. As a result, the power-off occurrence process is started due to an instantaneous power failure, and even if the infinite loop of FIG. 28 is entered, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the main CPU 101 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

A rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to constantly supply power to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is shut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processings can be reduced.

[1-5-1-9. Power-on process flow seen from operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process viewed from the person performing the operation (for example, a person related to the hall) will be briefly described.

[1-5-1-10. Flow of setting change processing]
First, the setting changing process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value that has been set, it is first necessary to perform a power-off operation (power switch 35 OFF operation). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled, and the setting is changed. The processing is started, and the setting can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for RWM initialization When (transmission) is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display that the backup clear process has been performed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup clear process has been performed. It may be displayed in the area.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased. That is, the information indicating the set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but is set when the set value is "6". When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state is terminated and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all the switches is validated.

Thus, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[1-5-1-11. Flow of setting confirmation processing]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process executed on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, and is not executed internally when the game permission flag is turned off.

In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on. The power switch 35 is turned on without a pressing operation.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. Becomes

When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display monitor 334 displays the performance display (base value). Is displayed and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[1-5-1-12. Flow in abnormal process]
As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (the setting key 328 is turned ON and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed while the power is not turned on). In addition, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the (ON operation of the power switch 35), the backup process (details described later) without the setting change process is performed, or simply. When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal time process is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal time process will be described.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled (internal). When abnormal, processing is started). The reason that the operation related to the setting is validated is that the game permission flag can be turned on by executing the setting change process.

When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. This allows the operator to confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

Further, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, any operation will not react, and unless the above-mentioned setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off, the pachinko game can be executed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. It should be noted that the operation of all the switches being invalid means a situation in which each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, and each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) also include those in a controllable state.

[1-5-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information relating to the game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700. It

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting mouth winning detection process (step S61). The starting mouth winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning in the general winning opening 53.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning the special winning opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sphere passage detector passage detection process (step S65). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, based on the fact that the passage detection of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passage detector (not shown), the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game ( Random number). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-5-2-2. Starting mouth winning detection processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting mouth winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start opening switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the first special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start winning a prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held first start winning awards (the number of held first special symbols) is less than 4 (step S74). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S75. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of retained first start winning awards.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (step S76). ). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination By referring to the table, the symbol designating command, the hit selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S78). The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process. In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), and selects a variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 15, since the variation pattern is stored in association with the variation display time of the decorative pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern designation command is information that can substantially represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved first winning opening winning numbers (step S79). The command for increasing the reserved number of the first starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78 and the like. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a reserved number overflow command for the first starting opening winning a prize, and then proceeds to step S81. The reserved number overflow command of the first starting opening winning a prize is a command indicating that the first starting opening winning has been made when the reserved number of the first special symbols is the upper limit (for example, 4), and to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 31, the reason why the first start opening winning number hold number overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S72 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the second special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting winning a prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held second winning opening winnings (the number of held second special symbols) is less than 4 (step S84). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S85. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second start opening winning a prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied (step S86). ). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Also in the second special stop symbol determination process, similar to the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, the second special symbol For the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designating command, the jackpot selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Then, based on the result of the big hit determination, the process of selecting the variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved second winning opening winning numbers (step S89). The command for increasing the reserved number of the second starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the starting mouth winning detection processing.

When the game ball winning in the first starting opening 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 440 are detected at the same time, whichever of the setting checking process of step S72 and the setting checking process of step S82 is performed? Only one of them may be performed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the number of the second starting port winnings held is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, without transmitting the reserved number overflow command for the second starting opening winning to the sub control circuit 200. The starting mouth winning detection process has been completed. This is because it is in the non-time saving game state that the set value suggesting effect described later can be effectively performed.

[1-5-2-3. Setting check process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU 101, and this setting check processing is the same processing in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31 for both). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 21) may be performed, but in the first embodiment, the set value set Emphasis is placed on checking whether is normal.

As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S721 whether the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a prescribed range). As described above, in the first embodiment, since “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”, here, the setting value data is It is determined whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5". When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is ended. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. When determining that the special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S724, and when determining that the special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO in step S723), proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol that is being variably displayed. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (see FIG. 31) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), The variable display of the special symbol is continued and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. And after that, it moves to step S726.

For example, when a game ball is won in the starting openings 420 and 440 while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the variable display of the special symbol (before the variable display of the special symbol is finished). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When determining that the main CPU 101 is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), even if the special symbols are being displayed in variation, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols in the variation display is not displayed. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. In this case, the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off once and the setting change process is executed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol that is being displayed is cleared in the backup clear process, including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched. That is, the payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) is controlled so that electric power is not supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and turns the handle 32 in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not shot and the player cannot play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched in step S726, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S727 for abnormal time processing.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or even if the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. After finishing the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 26). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 27 is performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence processing of step S385, that is, the figure The processing of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in FIG. 28 is performed.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and the main RAM 103 If the set value data stored in is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even when the game is being executed, it becomes impossible to continue the game when the set value data is not normal, unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. Unable to play the game. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, even if the variable display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, the power is once turned off and then turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is thrown in and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, a big hit determination random number) stored in the main RAM 103 for holding are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the held various data are based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 or the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed on the basis of setting values that are not normal for the various types of pending data, and it is possible to improve security.

As described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 in step S724. , Prohibits the stop of the second special symbol in the variable display when the special symbol in the variable display is not only the first special symbol but also the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S724, The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display, not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also in the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S725, The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 21) and at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. Not limited to, for example, during the setting confirmation process (see step S24 of FIG. 22), the setting change process (see step S26 of FIG. 22), the backup clear process (see FIG. 24), the variable display of the special symbol When it is started, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, when passage is detected by the passage gate switch 491 (see FIG. 9), when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is started, when the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is stopped, etc., the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing. May be performed. It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined timings are examples. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only with a specific timing as a trigger, but also with a plurality of timings (for example, all or some of the above timings) as a trigger. Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process, the game permission flag can be immediately turned off regardless of whether or not the big hit game is being performed, and the game can be advanced. Although it is made impossible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check processing and the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may be caused by the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (eg, big hit determination process) be performed in a state where the set value data is not normal, various determination processes are not performed, and after the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time, It is preferable to stop the special pattern by losing.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the normal symbol is also prohibited if the normal symbol is being variably displayed. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[1-5-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number updating processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101, in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in step S93 and step S94, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. Thereby, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) and normal symbol display portion 71, and the special symbol display portion (first special symbol). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform the variable display and the stop display for the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage/game state data generation process (step S97). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates storage/gaming state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/gaming state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[1-5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values ("00" to "08") written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each process of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the respective processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, checks the number of pending displays of the variable display of the special symbol, and if the pending number is not “0” (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the starting mouth winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets it to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting mouth winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is “0” (when there is no held ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process (“01”), when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag, the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the post-determination waiting time is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the big hit when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed. Determine whether the result is a "big hit". When the jackpot determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105), which will be described later, in the control state flag to set the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the latency timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S110) described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has passed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described special winning opening opening process (step S106) in the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the special winning opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the after-mentioned special winning opening opening processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S106). In this processing, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing for opening the special winning opening, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the opening It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the control state flag, a value (“05”) indicating a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets a special winning opening residual ball monitoring time in a waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time set in step S107 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process described later. Immediately before the end of the processing for opening the special winning opening, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, when the control state flag has a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing, and the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the main winning opening counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times of opening the special winning opening (that is, the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management processing in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval). Time) to the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit ending interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit ending interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening times, the main CPU 101 performs the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S108). In this processing, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time before opening processing for special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The value of the frequency counter is stored and updated so as to be increased by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this processing, the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106) is set to be executed again. In addition, immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit ending interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“ 08") in the control status flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set to be executed after the processing of step S109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of the special figure 1-2, the special figure 1-8, and the special figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control for shifting the game state to the high-probability game state. , If the above-mentioned main symbol is any of special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, and special figure 2-1, the control to make the game state a low probability game state (probability variation flag OFF) To do.

Next, the main CPU 101, if the jackpot gaming state is over, or if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss", performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of reserved pieces (starting storage information) by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the special symbol storage check process (step S102) described above is set to be executed. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot determination result is “miss”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the special symbol game end process (step S110). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, “03” when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”. To do. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the shift control to the big hit game state is executed. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening processing (step S106), the special winning opening remaining ball monitoring processing (step S107), and the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot gaming state is executed.

When the termination condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S106), the special winning hole remaining ball monitoring process (step S107), the big hit ending interval process (step S109), and the special symbol game ending process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order to end the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. The normal symbol control process of step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 33 (see FIG. 40 described later) also branches the process flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

The processing program in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched depending on the status. ing. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[1-5-3-2. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held second start opening winnings (variable display of the second special symbol) (second start information number) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held second starting mouth prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of held second starting mouth winnings is not "0". If determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (first start information number) of the first start winning a prize (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S115 and determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is "0". If determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first number of pieces of starting information corresponding to the number of reserved first starting opening winnings. In the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the variable display or the first special symbol that is being held. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed is stored as starting information. Then, in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the four first special symbols that are held. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each first special symbol starting storage area includes, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the first starting opening 420, a random number value for symbol determination, data indicating a determined variation pattern, and the like. included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the first starting opening winning a prize. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning the starting mouth, and the jackpot determination random number value previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on the jackpot determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening, the determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “miss” (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 31) in the waiting time timer. .. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs demo display processing for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second number of pieces of starting information corresponding to the number of reserved second starting opening winnings. In the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the variable display or the second special symbol which is being held. In the second special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable display is stored as the starting information. Then, in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each second special symbol starting storage area includes, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the second starting opening 440, a random number value for symbol determination, and data indicating a determined variation pattern. included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second starting opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117, executes the processing of steps S118 and S119, and then ends the special symbol storage check processing.

[1-5-3-3. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (fluctuation display start waiting time) set by the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the hour/hour counter, and the hour/hour flag and the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17) and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) round number upper limit value (big winning opening number upper limit value) ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs time reduction counter subtraction processing. The time saving counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[1-5-3-4. Time reduction counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the time saving counter subtraction processing by the main CPU 101. The time reduction counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the big hit end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S151). The time saving counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set time saving counter becomes zero. When the value of the time saving counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour counter subtraction process. Note that, although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter in the first embodiment is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time saving counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour counter subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the time saving flag to OFF, that is, setting "0". When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving counter subtraction process.

[1-5-3-5. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit ending interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The number-of-rounds distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. When the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the jackpot flag, that is, processing for setting the jackpot flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF (step S166).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit during the big hit end interval process is a probability-varying big hit (step S168). When it is a probability variation big hit (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. When it is not the probability variation big hit (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability variation flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S172). In the first embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), a jackpot of 100 times of shortening time (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2-). 1 and the like), the time saving counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed (eg, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), the hour/hour counter is set to 10,000 times. However, the time saving counter that is set when the jackpot continues until the next big hit game state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, it is a reality. It is good if the number of times can not happen. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not actually occur even if the game continues from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall in the time saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. It will be. Furthermore, when it is a big hit of 100 times of time saving, the counter processing is performed (100 times is set to the time saving counter), and when it is a big hit in which time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed, flag processing is performed ( As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state may be continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S173). The fluctuation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

[1-5-3-6. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not being turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern in the case where both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15) (both big hit and loss). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

[1-5-4. Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. Normally, the symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 indicate a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 40, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of steps S192 to S196. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol storage check processing (step S192). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process, checks the variable number of the variable symbols of the normal symbol, and the retained number is "0". If not, processing such as normal hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) described later to the ordinary symbol control state flag, and the variation time determined in this process. Set the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol elapses, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 normally performs a symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process (“01”), and when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. Normally, the value (“02”) indicating the symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after confirmation elapses, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101, normally the symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process ("02"), when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, normal It is determined whether or not the result of the symbol determination is "normal hit". Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is “normal hit”, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric auditors product release setting process, and indicates a normal electric auditors product release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. Set the value ("03"). That is, this processing is set to execute the later-described normal electric auditors product opening processing. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol determination is not “normal hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the result of the normal hit determination is "normal hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product release processing (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the normal electric auditors product opening process, the main CPU 101 says that a predetermined number of prizes have been won during the opening of the normal electric auditors product 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electricity supplier opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, decreases the data indicating the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the normal symbol by “1”. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the variable display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the normal symbol storage check process (step S192) described above is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 normally ends the symbol control process.

[1-6. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer at the time of activation, and the power interruption process is executed when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an operation unit input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to the first example and the second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) has been performed beyond the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first starting winning opening overflow point, and when the reserved number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the first starting winning opening overflow point. To do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect mode determination process. In the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as the normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and therefore, if the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's discouragement cannot be measured. .. Therefore, by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state, it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player without directly giving a loss to the hole. It will be possible. Further, some of the players suspend the firing of the game ball when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is the upper limit. In this respect, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball of the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggesting effect is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the reserved number overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to infer the setting only once. For example, it is difficult to infer the setting only with information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to infer the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is possible to do so.

In addition, as described above, the reason why the first start winning combination hold number overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process of step S72. is there. Therefore, when the setting value data is not determined to be normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. The sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point) when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is performed over the holding upper limit. At 49 points against 50 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 31) If it is determined not to be normal in (see), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 to be described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game. ..

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit. (See FIG. 31 ), on the condition that the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is made in the same manner as when the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make it suggestive production.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, the sub CPU 201 randomly determines a specific winning opening of the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53 (see FIG. 5, for example) at the start of the reach effect, for example, by lottery. .. Then, while the reach effect is being executed, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, among players, there is a player who interrupts the firing of a game ball when a reach effect with a long variation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. In addition, in the reach production, it may be immediately understood that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, for the player, the variable display is not started next until the reach effect is finished, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. Moreover, if the game machine administrator can set the set value, the player may be suspicious that the set value of the pachinko machine on which he/she is playing is low, but this second According to the example, it is possible to reduce such a fear and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, when the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning opening 53 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by, for example, a lottery, which is the specific winning opening. It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing whether or not it is. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

In the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is randomly selected from among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning opening 53 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by, for example, lottery. However, it is not always necessary to randomly determine the specific winning port, and a fixed winning port may be used as the specific winning port.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is executed, but the main CPU 101 may make the decision.

In addition, when a game ball is won in a specific winning opening during execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is the starting opening, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (see FIG. 31) is performed. Be seen. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), not only the setting suggestion effect is not performed, but also the special symbol that is being variably displayed is prohibited from being stopped by the process of step S734. To do. Further, also with respect to the sub CPU 201, the variation effect of the decorative symbol is continued even when the variation effect of the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect is being performed. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes a voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output a voice based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes a control process for the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[1-6-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no error or missing.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, and only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process which is separately made into a subroutine. In the first embodiment, an effect pattern indicating a type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and thereafter, effect contents executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by effect mode determination processing described later. Has become.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31) while the game is being executed, and in this setting check process, the set value data is "0" to " If it is not within the range of “5” (NO in step S721 of FIG. 32), the processes of steps S722 to S726 are executed, and then the abnormal condition process of step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the setting value data is "0" when the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. "(5)" (for example, when YES is determined in step S721), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the setting value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101, a specific timing (for example, at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420/second starting opening 440, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the variable display of the special symbol is started. Command) indicating the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “current set value”) indicated by the command received this time is appropriate. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the present set value.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value is normal if the previous setting value and the current setting value match, and the setting value is abnormal if the previous setting value and the current setting value do not match. To determine.

Further, when the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes processing when the setting value is abnormal. This abnormal-time execution processing displays, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, or instead of or in addition to this, a message that the set value is abnormal is displayed. This is a process of outputting a voice to be notified.

The above-mentioned determination of suitability of the set value information is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the present set value are the same. For example, all the set value information received three or more times are the same. It may be determined whether or not there is a match between some of the set value information received multiple times (for example, the set value indicated by the command received two times before and the set value information this time). It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 22) has been executed, the setting value is stored in the work RAM 203 this time. However, it is not determined whether or not the past setting value including the previous setting value and the current setting value match.

Further, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of suitability of setting value information) is preferably performed not only during execution of a game but also when power is turned on after power is cut off unless setting change processing is performed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[1-6-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of generating a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily storing the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message and the effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of reading a message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table and transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this processing ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission processing. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[1-6-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the presence/absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence/absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[1-6-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering, as a slave table, the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer (step S274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[1-6-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if the message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[1-7. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, according to the set value that is set, jackpot probability, reach probability, variation time of the special symbol, selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, probability variation plunge rate, Although the time saving rush rate) is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them depending on the set value, and only one of them may be changed according to the set value, or a plurality of them may be changed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the normal symbol display portion 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of “normal hit”), the normal electric auditors product 460 is The closed state is changed to the open state for a predetermined period. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing at which the normal electric auditors product 460 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing of launching the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the firing timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the backup clear processing (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed. Therefore, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is surely written. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared is set by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot gaming state has ended, until a predetermined number of games have been executed (until a special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times), a high-probability game state is set, and after the execution of a predetermined number of games has been finished, a low In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the stochastic gaming state (a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine), when it is controlled to a high-probability gaming state (before execution of a predetermined number of games ends), setting change processing The probability variation flag is set to OFF when the backup clear processing is performed without accompanying, and the ON setting of the probability variation flag is continued when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing (remaining high probability game state). The memory of the number of games is retained). Further, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the probability variation flag ON setting is continued, and when the setting value different from the previous time is set. The probability variation flag may be set to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the special winning opening 540 is opened when the number of game balls winning the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When either one of the conditions of when the state time reaches 30 seconds is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from an open state to a closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can win a game ball in the special winning opening 540 in one round are different). A condition may be prepared) and such a condition may be changed according to the set value so that a condition having a higher expected value as the higher set value may be easily selected. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 tends to be longer as the setting value becomes higher. To be In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the special winning opening 540 tends to increase. It is also possible to

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 460 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, It is possible to make the open time of the normal electric accessory 460 more likely to be longer as the set value is higher, by making the time for which the electric accessory 460 is open (open time) different depending on the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when it is a big hit that the probability variation flag is ON like the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4, after the big hit game state ends, the next big hit game is The high-probability game state continues until it is executed, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and at a specific timing (for example, when a game ball is won at the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440, a variable display of special symbols is displayed. At the time of being held, when the variable display of the special symbol is started), a transition lottery of whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of continuation of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). Lowering the transition probability). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, the setting check process (steps S72, S82) is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When it is determined that the check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transfer lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also OFF). Is set to).

As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation plunge rate, the shorter time plunge rate) are set according to the set value that is set. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is configured to be changed has been described, the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another extended example in which a part of the configuration is changed will be described. It should be noted that configurations that are not particularly referred to in the description of other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the first embodiment, but hereinafter, except for the step numbers, for example, the reference symbols are attached to the respective members such as the main CPU. Not attached.

[1-7-1. Expansion example 1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 is a high-probability game until the next big-hit gaming state is started after the big-hit gaming state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the special symbol big-hit determination is a big hit. A so-called “probability variation loop machine” in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the loop count reaches this upper limit, the big hit game state ends. After that, the game state is controlled to a low-probability game state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to the set value (such a game machine has a “limiter”). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 47 is a table showing an example of the selection ratio of the limiter count in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the extended example 1 has a loop number check means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limiter number lottery when the number of loops is 0 The lottery means, the loop number counting means for incrementing the loop number when the loop number is within the specified range (in the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the loop number is a specified value (the limiter upper limit is 5 in this example). Then, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state is finished to a low probability state, and the loop number resetting means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a prescribed value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when the big hit determination result is a big hit, at the start of the big hit game state, during the big hit game state, and at the end of the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the setting 1, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 30%, and 3 times with a probability of 25%, for example. There is a 15% chance of being decided 4 times and a 5% chance of being decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And 5 times with 5% probability. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 10%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that a larger limiter count will be determined.

In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the higher-probability gaming state can be repeated more, one chance ( It is possible to change the prize ball amount given to the player in accordance with the set value in the opportunity until the low probability game state is controlled when the player wins once. Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters is changed according to the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value due to the number of limiters. Has become.

In the extended example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always necessary. For example, there is a concern that the player may guess the set value, but the setting The number of times of limiter may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1.2, 4 times for setting 3 and 4 and 5 times for setting 5 and 6.

The number of limiters may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, if the above limiter number is separately defined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first limiter number for the first special symbol Is determined and is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit judgment of the second special symbol during the loop is controlled, without incrementing the loop number for the first special symbol, the second limiter number for the second special symbol To decide. In this case, the loop may be ended (controlled to a low probability game state) when either the first limiter number or the second limiter number reaches the limiter number, or the first limiter number and the second limiter number. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of the limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is determined when the number of big hits is a big hit, during the loop, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the number of times. When the loop count reaches the limiter count, the loop is ended.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called probability variation loop machine, but it is not necessarily a probability variation loop machine, and for example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also do it. The "ST machine" means to control the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and set the high-probability gaming state to a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number"). It is a pachinko game machine that continues until variable display of special symbols is performed, and ends the high-probability game state and controls to a low-probability game state when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that there is one chance (the opportunity until the low-probability gaming state is controlled when the jackpot is won once. ), it is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST number” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be set to be different depending on the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery, and make the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 6 times in setting 5. By setting the number of times to 75, the expected value of the number of STs can be increased as the set value becomes higher. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. In addition, when the number of STs is set to be different depending on the set value, it is preferable to make the number of time reductions common to all the set values. For example, when the ST count or the expected value of the ST count is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. It is conceivable that the number of time saving is common to all settings, for example, 60 times. Then, the sub CPU performs, on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, an effect that allows the user to know that the game is in the high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. It is preferable that, for example, a liquid crystal display device is used to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp that the game is in the high-probability game state regardless of whether or not it is in the high-probability game state. This makes it possible to change the ST number and the expected value of the ST number according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, the setting check processing (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening and the second starting opening. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even in a loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the limiter number, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability variation flag is also set to OFF).

[1-7-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2 has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

In addition, in this extended example 2, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation time saving game state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is lost, the small hit may or may not be determined.

In addition, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. From the small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which makes the opening mode from, and the fact that the game ball wins in the specific territory which becomes the opening mode by the execution of the small hitting game, through the payout/firing control circuit A payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls is provided.

In addition, in this extended example 2, the number of time saving is set to, for example, 5 times, and the specific opening is provided in the specific region. Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the starting opening as a normal hit in the time saving game state of 5 times, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece operates and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, when the normal winning does not occur in the time saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time saving game state and controls to the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the game is played by hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time saving game state, by hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area by left hitting. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the second special symbol game is mainly performed by making the small hit probability in the second special symbol game different according to the set value, for example, a time saving game state. In the above, it is possible to vary the opening frequency of the specific area and thus the payout according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and 6 for setting. And make it 1/4. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of winning the game balls in the specific area is, and it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed depending on the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability variation flag may be set to ON in the time saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability variation flag to ON.

In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. When the main CPU determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear processing, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[1-7-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2-2 is provided with a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. Based on the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery").

Further, the main CPU, in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, the first game state (for example, probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special lottery”) is mainly performed. And the normal game state in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF), and the second game state (for example, the probability variation flag is ON) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed. And an advantage game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) and a game state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to the second gaming state.

Further, a public figure gate is provided on the right side of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. When the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, normal win), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. To be done. Therefore, when the game ball is fired toward the right side region of the game region and the game is performed, the second starting opening is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side region of the game region and the game is performed. The winning frequency of the game ball to is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the predetermined jackpot is a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game that is released over a number.

Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, performs a big hit determination of the second special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, when the result of this big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined big winning opening A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, it makes a win determination of a small hit, when the result of the win determination of this small hit is a small hit It also has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. The setting 5 is 1/260, and the setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 in setting 4. No. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU executes a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery. When it is a big hit, it has a second big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds. Even if the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, Good or different big prize holes.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to the settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in the setting 1, 1/8 in the setting 2, and 1/7 in the setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. The setting 4 is 1/6, and the setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery, regardless of the set value, although it varies depending on the set value.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit. When a game ball wins the special winning opening, the payout/launch control circuit operates the payout device and controls so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination with a small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, based on the winning display of the game ball to the second starting opening, and the first special symbol fluctuation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variable display control means for performing variable display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means, after the first special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the first special symbol is stopped so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined time, the second special symbol is stopped so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, when the game ball is won in the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, the first special symbol is being variably displayed. Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, when the game ball wins at the first starting port while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, even if the second special symbol is being variable displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Moreover, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF. For example, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds in the first game state, 10 seconds in the second game state, while the average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is 1000 seconds in the first game state, It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. Special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of special symbols has stopped. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable time until the result of the second special lottery is displayed. Becomes

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is launched toward the second starting port by firing the game ball toward the right side region of the game region, for example, the second special symbol It will take some time before the variable display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns with different variation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit. Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out so-called aiming, such as winning a game ball in the big winning opening with the aim of determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area, for example, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by shooting a game ball toward, for example, the left side region of the game region. On the other hand, in the second game state, by passing the game ball through the universal figure gate, it is easy to win the game ball to the second starting opening through the ordinary lottery, and the variation time of the second special symbol is also increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in any of the second special lottery wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10 no matter which setting value is set. Done.

The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the variation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the variation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. However, it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

In addition, the sub CPU, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the decorative symbol variable display control means for controlling the variable display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, for example. Equipped with. However, the decorative symbol variable display control means does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner in the first gaming state, even if the game ball wins the second starting opening. The variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the game ball wins the 1 start opening is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above “conspicuous aspect”, the liquid crystal display device has, for example, in the approximate center of the display area, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol) and a right symbol (third symbol). It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by variably displaying. Further, in a small area, for example, one corner of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ◯ or Δ) that can be variably displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Such a shape) can be displayed. The proportion of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the proportion of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, so the player's gaze is to the first symbol to the third symbol rather than the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, the sub CPU, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, does not variably display the first to third symbols but variably displays only the fourth symbol, while When the game ball wins the 1 start opening, the first to third symbols are variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also variably displayed. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball is won in the second starting port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a conspicuous manner, and the game ball is in the first starting port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins is performed in a conspicuous manner.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball wins the second starting opening, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening, the probability of the result of the second special lottery being a small hit (one ninth to one fourth depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability (1/3 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the big winning opening by the small hit game is performed with a high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as a prize without increasing the execution frequency of. Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit varies depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is given according to the set value set. Can be different.

In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. Therefore, the main CPU also performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball is won in the first starting opening during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second game state, for example. When the main CPU determines that the setting check processing is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time processing. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit judgment for the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is a small hit, when it is determined that it is not normal in the setting check process, the main CPU causes the above small hit. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variation in the second game state is a small hit, it also includes information indicating that it is the second game state and information indicating that it is a small hit. Unless the various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[1-7-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in this extended example 3, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation time saving game state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is lost, the small hit may or may not be determined.

Further, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece, and the inside of the specific area. The small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which permits the entry of the game ball to is provided. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area by the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way, and the game ball entering the inside of the specific area is detected (entered) in the specific mouth, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a big hit, the first big hit game in which a round game for opening the big winning opening is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and the game ball entering the specific opening when the small hit game is executed, a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece over a plurality of rounds. The second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state is provided.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, the main CPU is the result of the normal symbol determination based on the detection of the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player makes a right hit, is a normal hit. At times, the ordinary electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it is easy to win the game ball to the starting opening. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hit game depending on the set value, for example, if the probability of a normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the variation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value, It can be realized by making it happen.

As a method of varying the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening according to the set value, a method of varying the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 in setting 1, 1/50 in setting 2, 1/40 in setting 3, 1/30 in setting 4, 1/20 in setting 5, and 6/setting 6. And reduce it to 1/10. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the more frequently the small hit game is executed, which in turn promotes the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

In addition, also in this extended example 3, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit judgment about the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear processing, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[1-7-5. Expansion example 4]
Even if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4 is not immediately controlled to the big hit game state, but the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. The condition device operates based on the condition device, and the accessory continuous operation device operates based on the fact that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the assumption that the condition device has operated. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the role continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passing through the role continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the expanded example 4 is provided with a character continuously operating left gate 1100 and a character continuously operating right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, the distribution device 1120 that can distribute the game ball flowing down the game area to one of the left side continuous operation gate 1100 and the right side continuous operation gate 1110 is a role continuous operation gate 1100. It is arranged above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are respectively provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled for detection of passage of the game ball, and are enabled based on activation of the condition device. In addition, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the condition device having been activated, and then the game ball is operated to either one of the continuous character left operation gate 1100 and the continuous right object gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection of passing.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls the 8R big hit game state in which a round game of, for example, 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU executes a 2 round round game in which a 2R big hit game state (selection rate 50%) and 16 rounds. Which of the 16R big hit game states (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is decided by a lottery, and the big hit game state decided by the lottery is controlled.

In addition, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation left gate 1100, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation right gate 1110, a big hit The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the game state is the same.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the role continuously operating left gate 1100 or the role continuously operating right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine through the outlet. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball, which has reached above the distribution device 1120, to one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 (see FIG. 48), and in the second posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball plays a role. It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 49).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing a game ball is different between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3 in the setting 2. Second setting, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.3 seconds and second attitude of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.5 seconds and the second attitude of 0.5 second. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

In this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big-hit game state is the same as when the game is played. That is, although the aspect of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is detected in the jackpot gaming state, when the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating left gate 1100 is detected and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, whichever of the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) When the right gate sensor detects passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, it is determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by a lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the amount of game balls that are expected to be paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility that

Further, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through either of the two gates (role continuous operation left gate 1100, role continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device operates, the role continuous operation The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. However, even if the condition device operates based on the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol made based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the game ball has both of the above two gates. A game ball may win the starting opening before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition ball has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, FIG. 31 (see step S72) and the setting check process may not be normal (for example, NO in step S721 of FIG. 32). In this case, even if the condition device operates, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and cannot proceed with the game.

In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates under which the condition device is operating below the sorting device 1120, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (continuous operation of the accessory device). Although the left gate 1100 and the role product continuous operation right gate 1110) are provided, it is not always necessary to provide the lower part of the sorting device 1120 at the role product continuous operation gate, for example, a starting opening and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120, by a regular operation, the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120, the starting opening that is the big hit determination trigger of the special symbol, and the general winning that does not become the big hit determination trigger. Divide into either mouth or mouth. Then, the operation of the sorting apparatus 1120 is, for example, the operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. 3 seconds, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture of 0.9 seconds. And the setting 5 repeats the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and the setting 6 repeats the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value, no matter what the set value is, it is possible for the player to shoot the game ball. It will be possible to have the fun of aiming for a prize at the starting opening.

[1-7-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not change the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value, but allows the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine to be changed according to the set value. .. In addition, in the extended example 5, the setting value can be set to any one of the five levels of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five levels, and may be a plurality of levels. It can be set arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to the setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the big hit game state. That is, when the setting value is set to the setting 1, the jackpot probability is less than 1/100, which is relatively high, but the prize ball amount paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with a game property.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished to the high-probability gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is finished and becomes the low-probability gaming state after a lapse of a predetermined period. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it becomes possible to execute a game having a game property called a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a big hit judgment of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop number”), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The gaming state is controlled to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-mentioned game property, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is finished when a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, the main CPU, when the jackpot gaming state ends, always or with a certain probability, turns on the probability variation flag, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends , Control to high probability game state. Further, in the high-probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when performing a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the game state is transitioned in the game state transition lottery, sets the probability variation flag to OFF. , Control for shifting from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property in which a transition lottery to a low probability game state is performed in the high probability game state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability. It becomes possible to execute the game by one unit.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called amu-digi game characteristic, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine game characteristic, and in setting 3, it is so-called. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probability variation loop machine, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine in the setting 4, and low in a high probability game state in the setting 5. Although it is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery for shifting to the probability game state is performed, it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game properties according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch and execute the game property called a so-called ST machine and the game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine game characteristic and the so-called probability variation loop machine game characteristic are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability game state after the jackpot game state ends, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends midway. In this way, by allowing two game features that are similar in appearance but are substantially different from each other to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine, etc., to use the pachinko machine differently. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest while also.

[1-8. Hall menu task]
First, the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The hole menu task is a task that controls the hole menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 in a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in the first embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process is being performed or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hole menu display process in step S302. The hole menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying a hole menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. Although the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 even when the process of step S310 described below is executed, the hole menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S310 are displayed. There is a difference from the menu screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. 52 and 53 are diagrams showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, when the hole menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the hole menu screen has a hole menu item display area 1610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 at the lower left and right of the screen in the substantially horizontal center, and a preview arranged substantially in the center of the screen. A display area 1630.

In the hole menu item display area 1610, each item of the hole menu is displayed. 51 to 53, only the time setting, the prize ball information, the setting history/setting confirmation history, the error information history, the monitoring history, and the warning display setting are shown as the hall menu items for convenience. In addition to the above, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is processing during setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, it is not possible to finish the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items for the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, images corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d are displayed. The hole menu screen is displayed so that the activated operation buttons and the inactivated operation buttons of the operation button group 66 can be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 51 to 53, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and the inactivated operation buttons are shown. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are invalidated).

The operator can select any one of the items in the plurality of hole menus by operating the activated select buttons (up/down select buttons 664a and 664b). In FIGS. 51 and 52, the hole menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hole menu item. For example, FIG. 51 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 53, it is shown that the “setting change/confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, it is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily understand the selected item. The screen in which the item of time setting is selected (see FIGS. 51 and 52) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for the selected item among the items of the plurality of hole menus is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 51 and 52), and when the "setting change/confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is performed. A preview of the change/confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 53). However, it is preferable that the setting value is not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Note that the operation cannot be performed within the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is being previewed, it is not possible to set the time on the time setting screen being previewed, and the time setting displayed as the hall menu item has been selected and determined. An operation for setting the time can be performed on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the sub-CPU 201, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, in addition to the hole menu screen, for example, in the extremely small area at the lower right so as not to disturb the operation on the hole menu screen, "setting is being changed" or "setting confirmation". It displays a character such as "It's inside." At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9) so that a voice such as “setting change” or “setting confirmation” is output from the speaker 24. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is allowed to know whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 executes hole menu processing in step S303. Details of the hole menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hole menu process (step S303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, a command (initialization command) or a setting confirmation indicating that the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the processing has been completed (power interruption recovery command) is received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command has been received (NO in step S304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hole menu process of step S303.

When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed set value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

Note that the changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 when transmitting the power interruption recovery command because the setting value has not been changed, but the setting value information is also transmitted to the sub CPU 201. You may

In step S304, the sub CPU 201 completes the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the history number stored in the work RAM 203 is changed. It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (step S305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data in the empty area according to the number of the history stored in the work RAM 203. This is to prevent the situation that the data cannot be recorded sometimes. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to 500 in the first embodiment.

If the number of histories of history information stored in work RAM 203 is not less than the predetermined number N (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and history information overwrite processing (step S306) is executed. In the history information overwrite processing in step S306, the history stored first in the history stored in the work RAM 203 (oldest history information) is sequentially overwritten.

In the history information overwrite processing in step S306, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 with new history information. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when a new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received, if there is a possibility that the predetermined upper limit will be exceeded, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203. The history information may be stored after deleting the. Even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, if more history information is stored in the work RAM 203 and the upper limit may be exceeded, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 is It is also possible to delete the copy.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S307 to record history information in a free area of the work RAM 203 (step of history information recording) (step Execute S307).

In this specification, the history information overwrite processing of step S306 and the history information recording processing of step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording processing.

The history information is time information counted by the RTC 209 when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, or the setting confirmation). Information indicating that the process has been executed), and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101. Information associated with and is the history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the setting determination processing described above. It is preferable that the history information includes the current setting value information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the history information, and if the setting change/confirmation history is browsed in the hole menu processing (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the empty area of the work RAM 203.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) will be immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the sub CPU 201 is activated. If the command from the main CPU 101 is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is an abnormality, and brings the sub control circuit 200 into a game stopped state. Each mode of display output, voice output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, is not only the information of the date and time but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

After executing the processing of step S306 or step S307, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S308.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting is changed in step S308, that is, whether or not the initialization command is received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power interruption recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. In the process of step S308, the sub CPU 201 only needs to be able to determine that the setting has been changed. Therefore, instead of determining whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, the changed setting is used. It may be possible to determine that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

In step S310, the sub CPU 201 executes hole menu redisplay processing. At this time, unlike the hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the hole menu screen that is re-displayed ends the setting change process and the game is played. This is a screen that is displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing of step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 54, one of the items in the hole menu displays the item for ending the hole menu. To be done. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the intention of the operator, but the setting change process The hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S310) that is re-displayed after is finished is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended by the intention of the operator. The hole menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 52) and the hole menu screen displayed in step S310 (see FIG. 54) can be operated by selecting and deciding any one of the items. Such a functional aspect (for example, a functional aspect of being able to browse the setting change/confirmation history screen) is common.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S308 that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S310. , In order not to obstruct the operation on the hall menu screen, for example, a character such as "the setting has been changed" is displayed in the extremely small area at the lower right. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) is displayed, for example, in the minimum area at the bottom right of the screen, “Change settings Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9) so that the voice such as “setting changed. RAM initialized” is output from the speaker 24. This allows the operator to know that the settings have been changed (also the backup clear processing has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. Becomes Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red through the LED control circuit 206 (see, FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting has been confirmed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S309. -The game screen restoration process of step S315 is performed, without performing the process of step S314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hole menu redisplay process (step S310) is not executed. Further, no character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 both when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed, the game cannot be executed because the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. On the other hand, when the process of step S310 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of character display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 between when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). ), the mode of sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the hole menu item It is possible to easily understand from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state capable of executing a game or in an impossible state without interfering with an operation for selecting a page, an operation for updating a page, etc.). It is possible to do.

After executing the process of step S310, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S311 and executes the hall menu process. The hole menu process of step S311 is basically the same as the process of step S303, but the process at the time of YES in step S3072 of FIG. 60 described later is different and will be described later.

In step S312, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not “end hole menu” is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. If it is determined that "hole menu end" is selected (YES in step S312), the sub CPU 201 performs a game screen return display process (step S315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the image for effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when playing a game or the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period. The initial image displayed when Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen returning process of step S315, and then proceeds to step S316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S312 that "Hole menu end" is not selected (NO in step S312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 50, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304), the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S311). In the process of step S313, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed has been started in the processing of step S313 when the operator performs some operation such as when any of the hall menu items is selected in. This is a process for determining whether or not, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or more, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without any operation (YES in step S313), the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen is ended, and the game screen return display processing of step S315 is performed. Execute.

If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating the effect control object has been received (step S314). .. The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, a jackpot game. Is a command indicating the number of rounds in a big hit game, a round interval command in a big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S314 that one of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen, and the game screen return display of step S315. Execute the process. As a result, a game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image unrelated to the game is displayed although the game by the main CPU 101 is proceeding. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the process returns to step S311.

After executing the game screen return display processing (step S315), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process of prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed, the hole menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned on again, and the power supply is turned off to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hole menu screen is basically a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change processing is executed, even if the setting change processing is completed, for example, the operator himself does not select the item “end hole menu” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S312), and Under certain conditions such that the operation time does not elapse the predetermined time (NO in step S313) and the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the processes of steps S311 to S314 are repeatedly executed. Then, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs some operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen), the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item will be displayed. It will continue to be displayed without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "end hole menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen restoration process (step S315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. Therefore, it is possible to ensure security.

In the first embodiment, when it is determined in step S314 that the command for generating the effect control object has been received, the game screen restoration process (step S315) and the hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) are performed. , But is not limited to this, for example, based on the fact that a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as receiving a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated, is received. The screen restoration process (step S315) and the hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) may be performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, a notification mode when an error occurs, including the backup clear process without the setting change process, will be described. FIG. 55 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and includes (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start port. A screen showing that an abnormal winning error has occurred and that the backup clear processing has been executed without the setting change processing. (c) The backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed It is a figure which shows the screen after the alerting|reporting period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was performed in the state which both have occurred.

As shown in FIG. 55, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents occurring in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the audio control circuit 205( Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When no other error occurs when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is within the display area as shown in FIG. Is controlled so that a character such as “RAM cleared” is displayed on the screen, and a voice such as “RAM cleared” is output from the speaker 24. Further, the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. The control for turning on all the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the control (see) is executed. The character "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using a larger area than the above-described minimum area (see Fig. 54) in which the character "Setting changed" is displayed.

That is, in the first embodiment, the backup clear process is always executed when the setting change process is performed (see FIG. 23), and in the hole menu redisplay process of step S310 executed after the setting change process ends, as described above, Although a message such as "The setting has been changed" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed and "The setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized. A voice such as "Done" was only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-described minimum area (see FIG. 54) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The character "RAM cleared" is controlled to be displayed and the voice "RAM cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 55(a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing accompanied by the setting change processing is to change the setting value (not the backup clear processing), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear processing is the backup clear processing without the setting change processing. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear processing accompanied by the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is conservatively reported in a mode that does not hinder the operation of the hole menu screen to be displayed again. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the backup clear processing from being illegally executed.

After the backup clear process is executed, if another error, for example, an abnormal start opening prize is generated, it is determined that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred, as shown in FIG. 55(b), for example. Both that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear processing is executed has a higher priority than the start opening abnormal winning error, a character indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is displayed in the upper order regardless of the order of occurrence. .. Further, the speaker 24 outputs a sound notifying that the backup clear processing having the higher priority has been executed, and the LED 25 emits light in a mode indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed.

Further, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) about the execution of the backup clear process is executed in a state where both the backup clear process is executed and the starting mouth abnormal winning error is occurring, the backup clear process is executed. Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start opening abnormal winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It In addition, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear processing has been executed to a sound notifying that the start mouth abnormal winning error has occurred, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 also clears the backup. The mode indicating that the processing has been executed is changed to the mode indicating that the starting opening abnormal winning a prize error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is preferable to execute the backup clear process without the setting change process. In the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, when the power is not turned on and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning ON the setting key 328. It is executed (see FIG. 22). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201, which receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command, performs the backup clear process without the setting change process. It is possible to determine that the process has been executed, and the hole menu display process (step S302) and the hole menu process (step S303) can be executed.

[1-9. Another example of hole menu task]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 20). (See step S1730 in FIG. 21), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (“0” to “5” in the first embodiment), the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. It is determined (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, the setting value is set when the work area check processing is not executed in step S1720 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, if YES is determined in step S1730), the sub CPU 201 performs setting determination processing (step S317 and The processing of step S318) may be executed. FIG. 56 shows the hole menu task in this case. FIG. 56 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes the setting judgment processing for judging the suitability of the setting value information. Another example of the hole menu task will be described below. However, description of the processing common to FIG. 50 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 uses the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current set value used for the progress of the game, even when transmitting the power failure return command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the sub CPU 201 executes a set value check process. This set value check processing (step S317) is performed by setting the current set value information (the set value information stored in the work RAM 203 transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power interruption) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 ( This is a process of confirming the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power is cut off. When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S314 are not executed.

After confirming the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the setting value check processing (step S317), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value is appropriate, that is, whether or not the setting value is appropriate. (Step S318). At this time, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S315. The processing after step S315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined to be unsuitable (NO in step S318), the process proceeds to step S319, and the sub CPU 201 determines when the setting value is abnormal. Execute the process.

The above-mentioned abnormal setting value process is a process of displaying an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition, in this set value abnormal process (step S319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a sound notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. You may make it perform a process.

As described above, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (the processes of step S317 and step S318) to set the set value. When it is determined that the setting value is not appropriate (NO in step S318), the abnormal setting value process (step S319) is executed, thereby making it possible to notify the gaming machine administrator that the setting value is not appropriate.

Although the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S317 and step S318) is executed when the setting confirmation processing ends, neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed, and the setting change processing is executed. When the backup process without the power supply (the power is not turned on and the setting key 328 is not turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on), or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information is appropriate by executing the determination as to whether the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure. This is because it is possible to determine

[1-10. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 50 and 56) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the hole menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hall menu item for which various information/settings are confirmed or various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 or/and the main button 662 by the operator. Selection processing is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 57, the hall menu items are time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, The case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “time setting” (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 performs time setting processing (step S3003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". (Step S3004). When determining that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize sphere information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize sphere information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize sphere information. The prize ball information is, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, the number of prize balls paid out every day in the past few days. Information, difference information (every day) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past several days, and the like.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “prize ball information” (NO in step S3004), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “setting change/confirmation history” is determined. It is determined (step S3006). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is “setting change/confirmation history” (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change/confirmation history process, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later), which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and the “setting change/confirmation history” has been selected, the sub CPU 201 sets in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) is displayed, and the operator changes history of the setting (setting value), confirmation history of the setting (setting value), browsing history, confirmed setting (setting value) Also, it is possible to confirm the changed setting (setting value). The details of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “setting change/confirmation history” (NO in step S3006), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “error information history” is determined. It is determined (step S3008). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S3008), it performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 58) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm or change the error information history. To do.

The error history displayed in the error information history process is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective, when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is transmitted without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ), the normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 58, an error information history table is arranged in the approximate center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date/time column in which the date/time when the error code is recorded, and a release date/time column in which the date/time when the error is released are displayed. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that a cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It shows that you can do it.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S3008), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “monitoring history” ( Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the monitoring history.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “monitor history” (NO in step S3010), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “warning display setting” (step S3001). Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is “warning display setting” (YES in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 performs warning display setting processing (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S3012), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “notification setting” ( Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 performs notification setting processing (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “power saving mode” ( Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode process, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. ..

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the “power saving mode” (NO in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “maintenance” (step). S3018). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When determining that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "confirm accessory operation" ( Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is "confirm accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 performs accessory operation confirmation processing (step S3021). In the accessory motion confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays a character motion confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to allow the operator to confirm the motion of the accessory.

When determining in step S3001 that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “confirm accessory operation” (NO in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting”. Yes (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “liquid crystal brightness setting” (YES in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 performs liquid crystal brightness setting processing (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “volume adjustment setting”. (Step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is “volume adjustment setting” (YES in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume of the sound output from the speaker 24. And

After the processing of step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "volume. When it is determined that it is not the “adjustment setting” (NO in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hole menu process and returns the process to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 50).

[1-11. Aspects of various devices when changing or confirming settings]
The modes of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) at the time of changing the settings and confirming the settings are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

First, at the time of changing the setting, it will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power, but even if the setting key 328 is turned on, unless the power is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are turned on. The LED 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and displays a message such as "Setting is being changed". Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice such as “setting is being changed” from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the set value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a hall menu screen is displayed and the characters "settings are being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, the sound "the setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the first embodiment, even if the setting value is updated, it is stored in the register and is not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is confirmed. However, even if the setting value is not confirmed, the updated setting value May be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. In addition, in the first embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating another operation means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do it.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sends an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, as long as the execution of the game is not started (for example, unless a command for generating the effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 displays the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to displaying a hole menu screen or a screen of a selected hole menu item (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the screen 204, the characters such as “setting changed” are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) and the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. The display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the output from the speaker 24, and the full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item. , When the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or the execution of the game is started, it ends. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 additionally displays the display "RAM was cleared" in addition to the display "Setting changed". You may do so.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "Setting changed", voice output such as "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." By turning on the light for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as browsing of the setting change/confirmation history screen from being performed by an unauthorized third party. Become. In addition, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state being ended, it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is the mode of the various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like when the setting is changed.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. Even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are turned on as long as the power is not turned on. The LED 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned on), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and says "setting confirmation in progress". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice “setting confirmation” from the speaker 24, and causes the LED control circuit 206 to turn on all the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits the power interruption recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state is completed based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. In addition, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display processing (step S316) based on the reception of the power failure return command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LEDs 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and when the execution of the game is started, completes the red lighting of the LEDs 25. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, all the red lights of the LED 25 are turned on for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), so that a fraud such as a setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed. It is possible to suppress the operation performed by a third party who does not have. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, so that it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state when no command is received from the main CPU 101 and it is abnormal even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start. When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is in the game stopped state, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output and voice output "Please determine the set value", and the LED control circuit 206 outputs the LED 25 (for example, as shown in FIG. (Refer to 1) is made to blink all in white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is the mode of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like at the time of confirming the settings.

[1-12. Setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process (see step S303 in FIG. 50) will be described. In the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change/confirmation history information (to be described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as a setting change history, a setting value confirmation history, and a browsing history of the setting change and confirmation. “Setting change history information” and “Setting confirmation history information”). In the following, before explaining the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation and browsing will be described first.

In the first embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting change process is started. Then, for example, by depressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased within the range of "1" to "6", and when the setting value reaches a desired setting value, the setting key switch signal is output. When it is operated so as to be turned off, one setting value provided for the progress of the game is determined from among the plurality of setting values, and the setting change process is ended.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting changing process, and thereafter, the initialization command indicating that the setting changing process is completed, and the changed setting value information, It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has ended, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 3” and “No. 4” columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later. To do.

Further, in the first embodiment, when confirming the setting value, the setting confirming process needs to be executed by the main CPU 101 as described above. This setting confirmation processing is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting confirmation process is started. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is turned on again after the setting key switch signal is turned off. As I did.

Further, in order to display the history of setting confirmation, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits the power interruption recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed after executing the setting confirmation processing. To do. At this time, although the setting value has not been changed, the setting value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S317 and step S318, see FIG. 56). Preferably.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the date and time data currently counted by the RTC 209. That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later. In addition, as shown in the column of "No. 1" in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed together.

The work RAM 203 according to the first embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state. Therefore, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operator or is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the first embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the “setting change/confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53 ), and the work RAM 203 is displayed. It means that a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) showing the setting change/confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

In order to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following processing. That is, during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S301). Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 highlights "setting change/confirmation history" (see FIG. 53). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads out the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and displays the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 61 described later) on the liquid crystal display. Displayed in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information (information indicating that browsing has been performed) indicating that browsing has been performed, and date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, when browsing ( The data is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed). This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording process (steps S306 and S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed. When storing the browsing history in the work RAM 203, for example, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change/confirmation history information and stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 2” and “No. 5” columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61 described later.

Here, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. , The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. If the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting change history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting change history is performed. Further, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 determines Of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting confirmation history is performed. Therefore, in the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is the initialization command or the power failure recovery command, in the hall menu process (step S303), “setting change/confirmation” is performed. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

Note that the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. When step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, which also serves as fraudulent monitoring of a game shop clerk. That is, in order to perform the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, a dedicated key (a key which is notched only in the corresponding portion of the setting key 328 and which is managed by the gaming machine administrator) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a backup can not be browsed, but a backup clear process that does not involve setting change processing can be browsed by a general game store clerk who does not have a dedicated key or an unauthorized player performing a backup process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by allowing the sub CPU 201 to perform the browsing record even when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to the time (a security camera normally installed in the store) It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

In the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or an interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the browsing record is performed, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the sub CPU 201 Although both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting are performed, “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the settings that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator, but Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed. When the setting is confirmed, at least the browsing history is browsed if it is browsed. It was recorded. This is because it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, there is a low possibility of fraud if there is no browsing history but only the setting confirmation history, but it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud if the number of history of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large. .. It should be noted that regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure return command, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step S303). (YES in step S3006), the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and the setting confirmation process is performed when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The browsing history may be displayed together when the operation type information indicates that the browsing history is displayed, and the browsing history may not be displayed when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been performed.

In addition, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 is browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hole menu display processing in step S302 and the execution of the game screen return display processing in step S315. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53) (YES in step S3046), the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed. However, when "Return" is selected on this setting change/confirmation history screen to make a decision, the screen returns to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed multiple times during Steps S302 to S315, the browsing record is once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of times of the browsing record performed between step S302 and step S315 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes the setting, confirms the setting, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records and increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during step S301 to step S312, these histories are recorded only once, and the power is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from unnecessarily increasing by turning off and turning off the history so that the history is not recorded.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed after the setting change processing is completed, and the hall menu redisplay processing is not executed after the setting confirmation processing is completed. Although the game screen return process (step S315) is executed, for example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off to complete the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall is returned. If the specifications are such that the menu screen is displayed, after returning to the game screen, the hall menu screen can be displayed again. In this case, each time the user selects and confirms “setting change/confirmation history” on the hall menu screen displayed again, or repeatedly executes the ON/OFF operation of the setting key 328, he/she browses, but in such a case Even if there is, it is preferable to keep the browsing record once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, a backup clear switch 330, and the like. It has operating means. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine manager.

Further, in the first embodiment, the fact that the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) capable of confirming the setting value is displayed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. The display/change history screen (see, for example, FIG. 66 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

59, 60 and 61 to 65, the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. The description will be made in comparison with the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 60 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change/confirmation history screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change/confirmation history screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

When "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 57) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 57), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the initial screen of this setting change/confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted.

The setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, and a first selection area 1660a. And a second selection area 1660b. FIG. 61 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, time information, operation type information, and setting value information are associated and displayed in a list. The date and time column displays the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, the setting value after the change is displayed when the setting is changed, and the setting value at that time is displayed when the setting is confirmed. In the operation type column, “change” is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and “confirm” is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. It Further, when the operation type is setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the operation type is setting confirmation, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3052). This time counting process is a process for starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timing of the timer is started after the setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 61). This is because the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after (see) is displayed).

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3053 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3053), the flow advances to step S3071 to be described later, and it is determined whether "return" has been determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “return” is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, “return” is determined. To be done.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, if the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which “Return” is highlighted, the highlighted display moves from “Return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 62).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again by performing any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (for example, refer to FIG. 52) when it is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3056 whether it has been determined to be “Page”. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Page” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ Page” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 executes page update screen display processing (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, an image simulating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the “Page” description. Thus, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the lower select button 664d is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, the first page is displayed. Circular display such that eyes are displayed can improve convenience.

On the other hand, if "Page" has not been determined (NO in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065, which will be described later, and determines whether or not "clear" is determined on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

After executing the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3058). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3055 and restarting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63) is displayed). ), so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S3059, the sub CPU 201 determines whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process advances to step S3062 described below.

When determining that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the sub CPU 201 executes page update processing (step S3060). When the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update process has been performed. The setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change/confirmation history screen when the setting change/confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is not shown.

In the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b, it is possible to select any of “No. 1” to “No. 5” in the setting change/confirmation history screen, and the down select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modification of the setting change/confirmation history process described later.

After executing the page updating process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes the time counting process (step S3061). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3058 and then starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update process (step S3060) is executed (after the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed), and the predetermined time ( This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

After executing the time counting process in step S3061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3059 and determines whether a page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3062 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3062), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process shifts to step S3072 instead of step S3071 because "return" is highlighted (selected) like the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen on the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Because it does not exist.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63), the highlighted display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 64).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063), and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. To clear the timer timing and start timing again, no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen was highlighted. This is because the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed at this time.

After executing the time counting process of step S3064, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ It is determined that “clear” has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3065), the sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066). The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 65). When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process of step S3065 is executed, the item "return" is highlighted.

In the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are erased, but all the data are not necessarily stored. Is not limited to erasing, but only some data may be erased. As a mode of erasing some data, for example, No. 1 in FIG. 1-No. 5, time (date and time) information corresponding to a specific No., operation type information and setting value information are deleted, a setting change/confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change) , Setting confirmation, browsing) of deleting the date and time (time) information, the operation type information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, among the time (date and time) information, the operation type information, and the setting value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is erased can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change/confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the depression of the main button 662. In this case, when the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is input. You can Thereby, it is possible to prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his/her own fraud. Therefore, for example, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to perform the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the sub CPU 201 executes the clocking process (step S3067). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 is This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data has been erased.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3068 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3071 instead of step S3072 because "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the time counting process (step S3070). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3067 and then starting the time counting of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again by performing any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) when not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3071 whether “return” is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Return” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays “ It is determined that “back” has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. This hole menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to be “return” in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

If the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the process moves to step S3073, the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is terminated, and the hall menu is displayed. The initial screen of the screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting change/confirmation history screen will end and the hall menu screen initial screen will be displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing from step S3053.

As described above, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change/confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation. However, the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the hall menu screen continues to be displayed without ending the hall menu screen as long as the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed even if no operation is performed. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

When it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has passed (YES in step S3072), the process of moving to step S3073 is the hole menu process of step S303 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56) described above (that is, during setting change or This is a process during setting confirmation), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S311 (see FIG. 50, FIG. 56) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process of step S311, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 of the hole menu process of step S311 (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S315 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56), finishes displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S315) and the hall. The menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the hall menu screen is returned (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be browsed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, the setting change/confirmation history screen will be browsed again if no operation time has continued for the specified time. Can't do it.

Also, regarding the processing that returns to step S3053 when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the hole menu processing (that is, the setting in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above). This is the process in the process of changing or confirming the setting), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S311 (see FIG. 50 and FIG. 56) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S311, even if the non-operation period has not reached the predetermined period (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen restoration process (step S315) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S316) are executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, it will only return to the hall menu screen (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be browsed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, the setting change/confirmation history will be displayed again even if the no-operation time has not reached the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period does not continue for a predetermined period, and Unless the above condition is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

As described above, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator may view the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation while waiting for a predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed and the game screen restoration process (step S315) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S316) are executed, so that the person who does not have the authority (For example, a hall staff member or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history, and security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, in the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing), time information, operation type information, and setting A list screen is displayed that shows all of the value information. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) displaying the time information and the setting value information when the setting is changed, and the time information and the setting value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 61) and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information when viewed are displayed. 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen on which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed in a list (for example, see FIG. 61), the first information, the second information, and the third information. It is preferable that the narrowing-down screen narrowed down to only specific information among them can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is useful not only for fraud detection, but also for information on how many days the business has been performed with the set value, and so on, which is highly convenient in business. The narrowing-down screen may display the target by narrowing down the target to the specific operation type information, and thus information (for example, current time information) not related to the operation type may be displayed.

[1-13. Another example of display screen displayed in setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. However, since the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that in FIGS. 59 and 60, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. A description of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the CPU 201 is omitted.

FIG. 66 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 67 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when “display setting” is selected. FIG. 68 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 69 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 70 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen in which page updating can be performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the setting change/confirmation history screen has a setting change/confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66, the confirmation setting change/confirmation history display area 1670 displays time information and operation type information, but does not display setting value information. That is, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed. The date and time column in which the time information is displayed shows the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed, and the operation type column in which the operation type information was displayed showed the operation type Confirmation and browsing) is displayed.

Further, in the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 1690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history, “Return” is selected and displayed (highlighted). In other examples as well, by operating the select button 664, the highlighted item can be selected.

When the select button 664 is operated to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 67). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed with the “setting display” selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the set value information is displayed. The setting change/confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen that is not displayed (see FIG. 68). ). Thus, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, by selecting “setting display” and deciding, it is possible to correlate with the date and time and the operation type. The set values will be newly displayed in a list. When the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

On the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 68) in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, select page by operating the select button 664, and “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 69). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 70) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d can be operated to update to the next page or the previous page.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 66) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed, Also, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the set value information is not displayed although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is displayed. In this page update screen, by operating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

Note that in this other example, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 66, and the time information and the operation type information are displayed as shown in FIG. 68, for example. Although it is possible to selectively display a screen displaying a list of the setting value information and the setting value information, the screen of FIG. 66 displays one or two of time information, operation type information, and setting value information. It may be a screen that displays only information.

Moreover, the setting change/confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who inputs a proper password). However, this will be described later.

71. In the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming the set value is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. As shown in FIG. 71, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall is opened when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of which of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is executed, but is not limited to this. The operation may be performed when at least one of the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is executed. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53 ). Setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the confirmation history screen is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is in a state where “setting change/confirmation history” is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 53) displayed in the second procedure. When the main button 662 is pressed with, the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change/confirmation history screen, date/time data, operation types (corresponding operation types among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set values are associated.

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has the authority) can change the setting on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to third steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs related control and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16 are provided, and the control unit changes setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Alternatively, the display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables confirmation, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit includes a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the power is off, and an RTC 209 that keeps time and date. The setting value is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or the setting confirmation in the work RAM 203, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209. Is stored as setting change/confirmation history information, and a setting display function for displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided. In the displayed state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209, and stores the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date and time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and is browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the first embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information and the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history related to the setting value can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of confirming whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation unit such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and control for performing game-related control. The main CPU 101, which is a unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit for setting various data and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit is a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit and is in a non-energized state. Even with the work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information, and the RTC 209 for timing the date and time, the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting means, When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as the setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting display function of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided. Stores the date and time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203 and displays the browsing history on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data of the setting change/confirmation history information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. It may be configured to additionally store.

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date and time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the configuration described above, in the first embodiment, it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that an unnatural operation regarding the set value is performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not the player has been hit, and can also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[1-14. Maintenance process]
Next, referring to FIGS. 72 to 74, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by sub CPU 201 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed will be described. Explanations will be given in comparison. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 74 is an example of the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices such as effect button switches 621 and effect parts such as the upper part 1000 that are connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various operating parts etc.) are targeted for the maintenance process. The operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the approximate center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74). This operation status display table includes, for example, a name string in which names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1-28) given to the various devices displayed in the name strings are displayed. And an operating state string indicating operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operating state column is changed from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. For example, when the production button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the production button 1 from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. Further, each of the effect products has a sensor for detecting that it is present at least at the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor for detecting the normal position is ON, the display is turned OFF and the sensor for detecting the normal position is provided. When it is OFF, that is, when the effect character moves, the display is turned ON.

The sub CPU 201 also displays the operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hole menu screen is returned (redisplayed), Further below that, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 74, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 72), the sub CPU 201 first acquires sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating states of the various devices with serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the above-mentioned various devices are in an ON state where there is an input or an OFF state where there is no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S3082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance screen display processing for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3083). ). In this process, the maintenance screen is displayed and the display is updated (for example, "OFF" display is changed to "ON" display).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (YES in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 57), and the process is performed. The process returns to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when determining that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, recent pachinko game machines and pachislot machines may have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, this is a case where the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" with the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "production button 2" having the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 causes the production button 62 to move upward so as to perform maintenance for the production function. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the sub CPU 201 executes a maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes a maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). For the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the "main button 2" being selected and decided, for example, when normal determination is made, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time to end the maintenance mode, the sub CPU 201 controls to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). It

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachi-slots, there are some which are provided with a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means. In such a game machine, a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be performed, the maintenance may be performed by activating each of the plurality of directing actors having different driving means at different timings, or may be independently activated to perform the maintenance. For example, in the gaming machine in which the driving means includes the different effect products 1 to 3, when the "production effect product 1+2" with the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 causes the effect combination. The article 1 and the performance accessory 2 are simultaneously operated to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “production effect product 1→2” having the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and decided, the sub CPU 201 first activates the effect effect product 1 and then operates the effect effect product 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the "production effect product 1" having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the effect operation product 1 independently to perform maintenance. Note that, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time and they interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, the “production product 1+3” with serial number 15 in FIG. 74 cannot be selected or cannot be determined even if selected. (Operation of the main button 662 is not validated). In FIG. 74, the serial number 15 “Production accessory 1+3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, first, the production accessory 1 is activated, and then If it does not interfere with the case where the effect character object 3 is operated), for example, “effect character object 1→3” with the serial number 18 shown in FIG. 74 may be selected and determined. As described above, it is possible to operate a plurality of stage effects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently. By disabling the operation, it becomes possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

Although not shown in FIG. 74, a payout sensor for gaming balls and medals, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachi-slot settlement button, and an enclosed button are included. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables a game by circulating the game ball, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game ball and the like be also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as the target of the maintenance process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, etc.) may be the target of the maintenance process. In addition, in the CR machine, the pseudo-play between the ball lending machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of the CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot) is performed based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (“OFF” display is changed to “ON” display).

[1-15. Mobile device cooperation function]
Next, a mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of cooperating the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to record detailed information about the game played by the player, and customize functions that do not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by satisfying predetermined conditions. You can

As the predetermined condition, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol may be determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect may be executed. Further, as customization of the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state is changed to a special song, or the liquid crystal display device. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed on 16.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. If the main button 662 is pressed while the variable display of the decorative pattern displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not performed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The initial image of the guide includes the characters "UniMemo (registered trademark)", the character "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 75, the items of the guide menu include “start uni-memo”, “big hit symbol/round number”, “model site”, and “return to game”. In the initial image of the guide, "Begin uni-memo" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 75, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "start uni-memo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "start uni-memo" is selected in the guide menu, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "big hit symbol/round number" is selected, the big hit symbol/round number is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). Then, when "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image displayed when a game is played, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or either the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. Also, a demo video displayed when the player does not win the prize for a predetermined period is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the effect image to be displayed when playing the game and the demo image described above. Is displayed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the uni-memo initial image, the characters "uni-memo", "let's customize your favorite character", and the uni-memo menu are displayed. Items of the uni-memo menu include “password input”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial image of UniMemo, "Enter Password" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of items of the uni-memo menu, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 76, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when “INPUT PASSWORD” is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Please enter password" and the password input menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of items of the password input menu are displayed. The items on the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "return to game", and "return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item among "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , The highlighted number or alphabet is determined. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When “OK” is selected in the password input menu and the password is determined, the plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected in the password input menu, the last input character is deleted one by one from the password display image.

When "Return to game" is selected in the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is used to display an effect image displayed when playing a game, or the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. Demonstration images that are displayed when a prize has not been won for a predetermined period are displayed in both the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When “Return” in the password input menu is selected, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[1-16. Modification of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described below.
[1-16-1. Modification 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
First, a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83.

The setting change/confirmation history process in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, except that the setting change/confirmation history process has an authentication function for browsing the set value. .. In the following, differences from the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60 will be described in detail. In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the timing process (see step S3052 in FIG. 59 and the like) is performed in order to display. Also in this modification 1, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The hall menu screen may be displayed on the screen, but in the following description, the description of the timing process will be omitted.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this setting change/confirmation history processing, "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53) being displayed in step S3006 of FIG. The process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, for example. The password request screen to be displayed is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 80 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 81 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201.

In the first modification, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. 80), the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes password input processing (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the input password is correct, and if the input password is correct (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is not correct (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display processing is executed, for example, the screen shown in FIG. 82 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 82 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is improper in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process of step S3100, if it determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), it determines authentication OK (YES in step S3110), and It moves to S3120. On the other hand, when determining that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process.

It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the input password is appropriate when the main button 662 is pressed after the password is input on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the above-described authentication NG process of step S3103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, the setting change/confirmation history screen displaying the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information is displayed. You can As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information of the set values from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display processing. At this time, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) in which date and time data, an operation type, and a set value are shown in association with each other is displayed.

After the setting change/confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3130). If it is determined that the page update operation is performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process advances to step S3150.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3150 whether "clear" is determined. The operator depresses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 64) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3150), it executes the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3160), and proceeds to step S3180. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed, all history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see, for example, FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3170 whether “return” is determined. On the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operator presses the main button 662 with “return” selected (highlighted state). Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3170), it executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3180) and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of transition to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 83 is a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, in which the setting value can be confirmed/confirmed. It is a flow figure showing an example of an operation procedure until a history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, a hall is opened when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a password (see FIGS. 80 and 81) and determines the adequacy of the input password.

As a fourth procedure, if the password entered in the third procedure is correct, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the value information, more specifically, date/time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, the person who has the authority to use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) changes the setting on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs related control and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 16 are provided, and the control unit changes setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Alternatively, the display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit that enables confirmation, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201, and the display control unit includes a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the power is off, and an RTC 209 that keeps time and date. The setting value is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or the setting confirmation in the work RAM 203, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209. Is stored as setting change/confirmation history information, and a setting display function for displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided. In the displayed state, when the main button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209, and stores the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date and time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and is browsed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the first embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information and the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history related to the setting value can be stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of confirming whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation unit such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and control for performing game-related control. The main CPU 101, which is a unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a setting unit for setting various data and a data transmitting unit that transmits various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit is a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmitting unit and is in a non-energized state. Even with the work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information, and the RTC 209 for timing the date and time, the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting means, When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or the setting confirmation, the set value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as the setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting display function of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided. Stores the date and time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203 and displays the browsing history on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data of the setting change/confirmation history information displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with the information indicating the browsing history. It may be configured to additionally store.

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation in the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203, the set value, and the date and time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the configuration described above, in the first embodiment, it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, so that an unnatural operation regarding the set value is performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not the player has been hit, and can also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[1-16-2. Modification 2 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88.

The setting change/confirmation history process according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is basically the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “high”. It is configured to perform switching operation to any of the three volume positions corresponding to "," "medium", and "small", and to perform switching operation to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is preset. When they match the order, the user is authenticated as an administrator. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by rotating the jog dial and pressing the jog dial to determine the volume.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice control circuit 205, and the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 85) in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and is capable of performing a slide operation for setting an initial setting value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to any one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "high". The switching operation is performed, and the switching operation is sequentially performed to the plurality of volume positions 1, 2, 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large”→“medium”→“small”→“medium”. That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The pattern is operated, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set values, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set values.

As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern indicating a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “small”) in FIG. 84, or volume position 2 to volume position 3 (volume). An operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to "large") can be held in advance.

Thereby, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating the respective volume positions of the volume switch 108, and determines whether the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern or not from the management authority. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. Like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330, the volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, “setting change/confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 52) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57 (YES in step S3006), and “setting change/confirmation” is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while "History" is highlighted (see FIG. 53).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs a volume password request display process (step S3201) for displaying a screen prompting the user to input a volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed. Execute.

FIG. 86 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 87 is an example of the volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the volume password request display process of step S3201 of FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* operate the volume switch to input the password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information.

In the second modification, when the setting change/confirmation history processing is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. 86), the volume password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). May be displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed with this setting change/confirmation history screen being displayed, or the volume password may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes an operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with a preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation is performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that the correct operation is performed (YES in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processing of step S3120 and subsequent steps in FIG. 78.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process that displays that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Perform (step S3204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and proceeds to the process of step S3110 in FIG. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The volume password is wrong. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Although FIG. 84 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be at least three or more arbitrary ones. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and position information (volume position information acquired by this position detection function is acquired, and the acquired order and work RAM 203 are stored in advance). The setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on the condition that the stored predetermined operation sequence matches.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 88, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process, as the first procedure of confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall is opened when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a volume password (see FIGS. 86 and 87), takes in the input volume password, and determines the propriety of the taken-in volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by comparing the imported volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both are matched and authentication OK is obtained, it is determined that the volume password is correct. to decide.

As the fourth procedure, if the volume password entered in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the set value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, and browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which constitutes the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button that are at least the operation unit that receives the operation of the player. 664, a non-game operation unit that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that allows a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time. The data transmitting unit transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or setting in the work RAM 203. Confirmation, set values and date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored as setting change/confirmation history information, and a setting display function for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided. It is configured to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the units are operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-gaming operation unit is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation sequence can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. In addition, it becomes possible to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the liquid crystal display device 16 The browsing history may be displayed on the screen.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, since it is possible to authenticate in the operation order known only to the authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. It should be noted that this operation sequence is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it for setting change and setting confirmation.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 detects each volume position of the operation switch. The position display function further includes a possible position detection function, and the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and confirms that the order of the acquired volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. The configuration may be configured to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the person having the authority is informed of the operation order in advance to identify the person having the authority. Without adding an operation switch, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to authorized persons.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the setting value is performed. Not only that, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only the person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display it when displaying the setting change/confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history processing described below, when displaying the setting change/confirmation history information, the input unit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It may be configured to perform authentication using a password input from.

[1-16-3. Modification 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game system 210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. This gaming system 210 is configured to include a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged on a network 230. As will be described later, in the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 cooperate with each other to perform an authentication process related to setting change/confirmation of confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change/confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 92). The setting change/confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, and includes a setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generating means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display/operation unit 222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a (registered trademark) or the like (see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display/operation unit 222 and the camera unit respectively configure an operation display unit and an image pickup unit in the present invention.

The control unit 221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, etc., and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or RAM, for example. I do. In the first embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL, and the password input screen for inputting the password to the operation display unit 222 (described later). 95) is transmitted to the server device 240 based on the above URL, and the input password displayed on the password input screen is transmitted to the server device 240 to obtain the authentication result notified from the server device 240. If the obtained authentication result is correct, the history information display control unit displays the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a mode including the set value. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by the CPU that operates according to a dedicated application preinstalled in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the constituent elements of the control unit 221 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that configures the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, respectively, in the present invention. An extraction means, an input screen display control means, an authentication result acquisition means, and a history information display control means are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for the authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 that accesses the URL, and sets a preset password. It is provided with an authentication service function or the like that determines whether or not the password is correct by comparing with the above, and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A that constitutes the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This setting change/confirmation history process is performed by selecting “setting change” from a plurality of items of the hole menu displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 51) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. -Confirmation history" is selected and determined, and it is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed in a state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53).

In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the timing process (see step S3052 in FIG. 59 and the like) is performed in order to display. Also in this modification 3, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the time counting process is omitted in the description of the third modification.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change/confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 92) is performed (step S3301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in a mode shown in FIG. 92, for example. It is executed (step S3302).

After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 can accept a data clear request, a cursor move (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operations of the main button 662 and the select button 664, in an acceptable state. Move to. The main button 662 is a button for making a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Also, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of steps S3303 to S3305. Note that, in FIG. 90, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 59 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, the process of FIG. 59 is performed between steps S3302 and S3303. The process of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 90, after the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3303 whether "clear" is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is erased (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3303), the process advances to step S3305.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3305 whether or not “return” is determined. The operator presses the main button 662 in a state (highlighted state) in which "Return" is selected in the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3305), the process advances to step S3303 to continue the processes of step S3303 and thereafter.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), the setting change/confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 92) is displayed. May be cleared. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change/confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This processing is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and based on the image data, the display operation unit 222 displays the two-dimensional code in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code read display process for displaying the dimension code 161a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the URL in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process that is temporarily stored is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 95), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display processing in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 to perform password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors the password display field 222c (see FIG. 95) while checking whether or not a password has been input (step S3404), and from the ten-key pad 222b. Process to accept the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

In the server device 240, the password sent from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 is collated with the registered password registered in advance, and it is determined whether the authentication is OK or the authentication NG depending on whether the two match. The server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the determination result. Thus, in the first embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 is configured to return only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password accepted in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs the authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 ( (Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when the password is determined to be correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 sets the display operation unit 222 to display the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S3402. Change/confirmation history display processing is performed (step S3406). In this setting change/confirmation history display processing, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the display information in which the setting change/confirmation history information held in step S3402 is embedded according to a preset display format. A process of creating and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 based on this display information (see FIG. 96) is performed.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. And a setting change/confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen 116g includes the setting change/confirmation history information being displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Contains.

Note that when the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed in the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302 (see FIG. 90), the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, “* read the two-dimensional code on the mobile terminal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Please access the authentication service by pressing." or the like, and a message prompting the shift to the authentication service may be displayed.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. The setting value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the first embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 94 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code read display processing of S1101.

95: is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal 220 of the game system 210 which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. In the password input display processing of step S3403 (see FIG. 91), the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 95 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 95, on the password input screen, a ten key 222b having keys of "0" to "9" and "*" and "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying a password input by the ten key 222b. Then, a message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "*Please enter the password. The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password input screen shown in FIG. 95, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password has been input by operating the ten keys 222b.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. 96, in the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g, the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is displayed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, for example. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 96, the setting change/confirmation history information displays the set value corresponding to the setting change/confirmation date and time.

In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the display format described above, the display format of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 96, the scroll of the setting change/confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supported. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change/confirmation history display process in S1107 after the setting change/confirmation history processing in FIG. The page shifts to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the button 222e and the select button 222f can be received.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3407). When it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page update operation is performed. Update processing is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page update operation is performed (that is, it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), page scrolling is continued. A page update process is performed (step S3408).

If the control unit 221 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped and the enter button 222e has not been pressed, the control unit 221 proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in this step S3409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 221 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 221 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment, the setting change/confirmation history information on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side is converted into a two-dimensional code as so-called raw data and displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A ( 90 (see steps S3301 and S3302 in FIG. 90), the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A on the side of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is photographed to obtain setting change/confirmation history information as raw data. The process of returning to the step is performed (see steps S3401 and S3402 in FIG. 91).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

In this regard, in the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and it is possible to display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A side by this dedicated application. ..

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have the dedicated application installed, even if the setting change/confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it must be viewed in the same display format as on the pachinko machine 1A side. However, it is difficult to recognize the setting change/confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only authorized persons can see the setting change/confirmation history information with the setting value, which is sufficiently confidential. It is possible to secure the sex.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the portable wireless communication terminal 220. However, the above data is shown in FIG. Is displayed. Therefore, if there is no dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read by a general-purpose barcode reader, it is not possible to understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered, and can be acquired only by authorized persons.

In the first embodiment, the authentication of the password is notified from the server device 240 of the authentication result, and it is determined whether the password is correct depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine whether the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct, Also, if you want to further secure the confidentiality, after the setting change/confirmation history information is encrypted on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side, a two-dimensional code is generated and displayed, and a special application to be installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is displayed. May be configured to add a function of decrypting the setting change/confirmation history information corresponding to the above encryption.

Next, a setting change/confirmation history information setting value confirmation procedure in the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 93.

As shown in FIG. 93, as a first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is not subject to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. Display the hall menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction to turn on the setting key switch signal, and can be turned in the opposite direction (to return to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the “setting change/confirmation history” by selecting and determining “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 53) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As the third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is main in a state where “setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information (see FIG. 92). ).

As the fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 94). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and confirms the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 95) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210, the individual pachinko gaming machine 1A, or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, compares it with the registered password, and performs password authentication. Here, when the authentication is OK, the server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of that fact.

As a sixth procedure, when the authentication is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change/confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 96). The contents including the set value are displayed on the display operation unit 222 as a reference). As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change/confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the first embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that accept various operations, and control related to the game. A main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A are provided. The control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 that enables the data, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit, and the display control unit includes a reception unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit and even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the sub CPU 201 by the data transmitting unit. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting change or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change/confirmation history information. The setting display function of displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A is provided, and in the state where the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed by the operation unit. When a certain main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored as the setting change/confirmation history information in the work RAM 203, so that the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. When the main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 reads the two-dimensional code and permits the display after password authentication, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the first embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date/time data as the browsing history. The display history may be stored in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. You can Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the first embodiment uses the mobile radio based on the information from the predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile radio communication terminal 220. It may be configured to display the setting change/confirmation history information on the communication terminal 220.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is used. The setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since only the authorized person can authenticate with the password known, the cost can be reduced without adding the input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. It should be noted that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it when changing settings or confirming settings.

Further, the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment includes the pachinko gaming machine 1A described above and a server device 240 that is connected to the network 230 and manages a site for authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine 1A is The server device 240 further has a generating function for generating the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the URL of the site, and the server device 240 uses the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 as a preset password. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 includes an authentication service device that performs authentication by comparison and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The camera unit that captures the two-dimensional code displayed on the screen, the extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and URL, and the input that displays the password input screen to enter the password. When the screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result is correct , And a history information display control unit for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the first embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A with the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is authenticated by the server device 240. The setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, it is possible not only to judge whether an unnatural operation related to the setting value has been performed but also to make it illegal. You will be able to judge whether it is the opportunity to investigate the action.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, and thus it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. In addition, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate a fraudulent activity.

Heretofore, the gaming machine according to each of the embodiments of the present invention has been described, including the effects thereof. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[1-17. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the first embodiment can be applied to a pachi-slot. When the invention according to the first embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the pachi-slot, the setting value can be changed by shifting to the setting changing process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachi-slot confirms that the above-mentioned setting changes were made, the signal generated from the setting switch was input by operating the setting key, and then the start lever was operated. When the signal indicating the above is received, the data indicating that the setting has been changed and the command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU, operation type information indicating that the setting has been changed (information indicating the setting change), and the RTC. Then, the date and time data currently measured, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In the pachi-slot, confirming the set value means operating the setting key (turning to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. As described above, the pachi-slot 1 shifts to the setting confirmation processing on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is ON, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot, together with the main CPU, constitutes a setting means that enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed.

In order to display the history of setting value confirmation, the main CPU confirms the setting value when the setting value is confirmed by the above-described operation and the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key. And the setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, the sub CPU, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating confirmation of the setting value, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received is stored in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The work RAM 203 is capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state.

Upon receiving the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command, the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs the hall menu display process of displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device included in the pachi-slot. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachi-slot is replaced with the “prize ball information” displayed on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "total medal information" being displayed, basically, the same screen as the hole menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is displayed. is there.

On the pachi-slot, browse means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. On condition that the main button is pressed in the state of being displayed, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed, for example, as a setting change/confirmation history screen.

The sub CPU of the pachi-slot executes the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as hole menu processing, setting change/confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. be able to. When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachi-slot, the hall menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachi-slot or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In the pachi-slot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on when the precursor game of “SBB” or “BB” is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the effect of the aura game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the aura game corresponding to “BB”.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are finished on condition that they have played the games of the number of stay games, respectively. The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of times of navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, or, like “BB”, the number of games added to the number of stay games in “SBB” may be added. The configuration may be such that addition (addition) is performed.

In addition, in the pachi-slot, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional addition A, B, and C are determined, the additional addition game number counter may be set to "2". However, the number of games in which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional-addition game number counter may be changed according to the type of additional-addition effect (additional addition A, B, C).

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to a fixed number of games, for example, “50”. Alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , One set of “50” games) and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not subtracting the value of the ART game number counter for each game. In addition, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push If a stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game from the game following the game for which the irregular press is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotary accessory 123 rotated by the drive of the stepping motor is described as an example of the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the vertical direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In addition, in the second embodiment, description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment is omitted, but the omitted description is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, “in the first embodiment,”, “in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment,” and “in the first embodiment,” Even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as “or “in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment””, particularly in the following second embodiment. Unless otherwise stated, the present invention can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment without departing from the spirit of the second embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced or combined with the configuration shown in the second embodiment. It goes without saying that it is possible. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a different shape, the same reference numerals may be given to configurations having similar functions (for example, the center unit 174 and the like) for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the same shape and the same processing, different signs and step numbers may be attached for convenience (for example, step S101 and the first embodiment. Step S1011 of the second embodiment).
[2-1. Game machine configuration]
[2-1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance and the like of a pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is an example of a front view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 98 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display portion and a second special symbol display portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 98 differs from FIG. 8 in that the LED unit 70 of FIG. 8 has a normal symbol holding display section 72 and a second special symbol holding display section 76, whereas the LED unit 70 of FIG. 98 has these. The point is not. The directions shown in the drawings are the directions in front view.

In the following description, the front and rear sides are defined as the front side and the back side as the front side when viewed from the player of the pachinko gaming machine, unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko game machine is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface visible when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIG. 97, the game board unit 17 includes a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a shot game ball can be rolled down is formed, and a center unit 174 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 20. , A passage gate 49 through which a game ball can pass, a first starting opening 420 arranged below the passing gate 49, a second starting opening 440 arranged below the first starting opening 420, and a game area 20. A distribution member 800 capable of allocating a part of the game ball flowing down to the winning path toward the first starting opening 420, and a passing ball 49 and the first starting opening through the game ball distributed to the winning path by the distribution member 800. A delivery member 820 that feeds one by one toward a closed region 836 provided on the upstream side of 420, a guide member 840 that can guide the game balls delivered to the closed region 836 to the passage gate 49, and a normal electric role Object unit 400, big hit attacker unit 500, small hit winning opening 560, small hitting winning shutter 562 that can open and close the small hit winning opening 560 by moving back and forth, and small hitting It is provided with a small hit winning prize solenoid 520 (see FIG. 99) for driving the shutter 562, a general winning prize 53, and an outlet 57. Further, a back unit (not shown in FIG. 97) is provided on the rear side of the game board unit 17.

The passage gate 49 is arranged below the center unit 174 (the liquid crystal display device 16) at substantially the center of the game area in the left-right direction.

A first starting port 420 is arranged below the passage gate 49, and a second starting port 440 is arranged below the first starting port 420.

The distribution member 800 is arranged on the left side region of the center unit 174, on the downstream side of the small hitting winning port 560 and on the upstream side of both the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, and on the left side. All or substantially all the game balls flowing down the area are distributed to a flow-down path toward the passage gate 49 or a flow-down path not toward the passage gate 49.

All or substantially all of the game balls that have been distributed to the flow-down path toward the passage gate 49 by the distribution member 800 and have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting opening 420.

The game ball distributed by the distribution member 800 to the flow-down path that does not face the passage gate 49 does not substantially pass through the passage gate 49 unless it bounces or jumps, and similarly enters the first starting opening 420. But almost never win. However, when the blade member 4622 described later is opened, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second starting port 440 (that is, the game ball passes to the second starting port switch 441), and the distribution member 800 allows the passage gate to pass. The game ball distributed to the downflow route that does not face 49 may win the second starting opening 440.

The distribution member 800 includes an upper distribution member 802 and a lower distribution member 804, and the upper distribution member 802 and the lower distribution member 804 are arranged above and below each other.

The upper sorting member 802 has a klune-shaped rolling surface on which a game ball can roll, and this rolling surface is provided with three holes through which the rolling game ball can pass. One of these three holes is a hole guided to the lower distribution member 804, and the remaining two are holes returned to the game area 20 (below the distribution member 800). That is, one-third of the game balls rolling on the rolling surface of the upper distribution member 802 are guided to the lower distribution member 804, and two-thirds of them are returned to the game area 20.

The lower sorting member 804 also has a klune-shaped rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and this rolling surface is provided with three holes through which the rolling game ball can pass. One of these three holes is a hole guided to the sending member 820 (more specifically, a receiving member 810 described later), and the remaining two holes are returned to the game area 20 (below the sorting member 800). Is. That is, one-third of the game ball rolling on the lower distribution member 804 is guided to the delivery member 820, and two-thirds is returned to the game area 20.

In addition, the game ball shot toward the left side area of the center unit 174 is configured to be received by the distribution member 800 with a probability of 100% or approximately 100%.

On the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16, between the lower allocating member 804 and the sending member 820, a receiving ball for receiving the game ball guided to the sending member 820 from the lower allocating member 804 and temporarily holding it is received. A stop member 810 is provided. Since only one game ball can stand by at the receiving member 810, the game ball guided to the sending member 820 while the game ball is waiting at the receiving member 810 falls from the receiving member 810. It is configured to flow down the game area 20.

In the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, the ratio of the game balls that can be received by the receiving member 810 among the game balls guided from the lower distribution member 804 to the sending member 820 is about 80%. Is designed to. That is, about 20% of the game balls guided from the lower distribution member 804 to the delivery member 820 fall into the game area 20.

The delivery member 820 includes a first rotating member 822 and a second rotating member 828. The first rotation member 822 is formed of a circular member in a front view, and a plurality of pockets 824 capable of receiving a game ball are formed on the outer peripheral edge portion at equal intervals along the outer peripheral direction.

The first rotating member 822 rotates in a constant cycle, for example, clockwise in a front view, and the game ball waiting on the receiving member 810 is one of the plurality of pockets 824 formed in the first rotating member 822. When facing either, it is received in the facing pocket 824. Since the first rotation member 822 is stored in the transparent storage case 826, the game ball received in the pocket formed in the first rotation member 822 does not drop from the pocket 824.

The second rotating member 828 has the same shape as the first rotating member 822, and a plurality of pockets 830 capable of receiving the game balls are formed on the outer peripheral edge portion at equal intervals along the outer peripheral direction. Further, like the first rotation member 822, since it is stored in the storage case 832, the game ball received in the pocket 830 formed in the second rotation member 828 does not drop from the pocket 830.

Further, the second rotating member 828 is disposed on the right rear side of the first rotating member 822 in the front view, and rotates in the direction opposite to the first rotating member 822 in the front view at a constant cycle.

Each of the plurality of pockets 824 formed in the first rotating member 822 communicates with any one of the plurality of pockets 830 formed in the second rotating member 828 when facing the second rotating member 828. It is supposed to do. Thereby, the game ball received in the pocket 824 of the first rotating member 822 is received in the pocket 830 of the second rotating member 828.

Below the liquid crystal display device 16 and on the upstream side of the passage gate 49 and the first starting opening 420, a closed region 836 capable of temporarily confining a game ball is formed, and a pocket of the second rotating member 828. The game ball received in 830 is guided to the closed area 836.

On the front side of the closed region 836 in a front view, a guide member 840 capable of guiding the game ball confined in the closed region 836 to the passage gate 49 is provided.

The guide member 840 is configured by a circular member when viewed from above, and, for example, three pockets 842 capable of receiving a game ball are formed in the outer peripheral edge portion along the outer peripheral direction. The guide member 840 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise at a constant cycle when viewed from above.

The three pockets 842 formed in the guide member 840 are configured so that all or substantially all of the received game balls can be guided to the passage gate 49. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the game ball trapped in the closed area 836 is configured so as not to flow down from the closed area 836 to the game area 20 unless it passes through the guide member 840, and thus is closed. The game sphere trapped in the area 836 is guided to the passage gate 49 with a probability of 100% or almost 100%. Further, as described above, all or substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 win the first start opening 420.

Although the closed area 836 confine the game balls sent to the closed area 836, it is not always necessary to use the closed area 836, and most of the game balls sent from the second rotation member 828 are guided members 840. It may be an open area as long as it can be accepted in.

Summarizing the above, almost all of the game balls shot toward the left side region of the center unit 174 are received by the distribution member 800. The game ball received by the upper distribution member 802 of the distribution member 800 is guided to the lower distribution member 804 with a probability of 1/3. The game ball guided to the lower distribution member 804 is guided to the receiving member 810 with a probability of 1/3. The game ball guided to the receiving member 810 is received by the receiving member 810 with a probability of approximately 80%, and as a result, is received in the pocket 824 of the first rotating member 822 with a probability of approximately 80%. The game balls received in the pockets 824 of the first rotating member 822 are all guided to the closed region 836 via the second rotating member 828. The game ball guided to the closed region 836 is guided to the passage gate 49 by the guide member 840 with a probability of 100% or substantially 100%. All or substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting opening 420.

Therefore, when 250 game balls are shot toward the left side area of the center unit 174, approximately 22 (1/3×1/3×0.8×250=22) of the 250 game balls are shot. The game ball passes through the passage gate 49, that is, the first starting opening 420 is stably won. Here, assuming that the number of game balls to be shot in one minute when the game balls are continuously shot is 100, the number of game balls to be won in the first starting opening 420 will be 8 to 9 in one minute. .. That is, the game balls are stably won in the first starting opening 420 in a substantially constant cycle such as approximately every 7 seconds.

In this type of pachinko gaming machine, the fact that a game ball does not win at the start opening continues for a period of time, which is one of the causes of a decline in interest. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the first start opening 420 is stably won, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest caused by the game ball not winning in the start opening. Become.

In addition, the game ball received by the delivery member 820 is prevented from being unnecessarily congested in the closed region 836 by the first rotating member 822 and the second rotating member 828. That is, it is difficult for the game balls to continuously pass through the passage gate 49, and thus it is difficult for the game balls to continuously win the first starting port 420, and after a certain time has passed since one game ball won the first starting port 420. , Another game ball is configured to win the first starting opening 420. The fixed time is preferably longer than the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times of the first special symbol that can be determined in the LG state described later.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to win the game balls to the first starting opening 420 at a substantially constant cycle while suppressing the continuous winning of the game balls to the first starting opening 420. Becomes

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the function of both the sending member 820 and the guiding member 840 suppresses continuous winning of game balls into the first starting opening 420, but is not necessarily limited to this. One of the delivery member 820 and the guide member 840 is provided, and after a certain time has elapsed since one game ball entered the first starting opening 420, another game ball enters the first starting opening 420. It may be allowed to.

The big hit attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The big hit attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20 so that the game balls flowing down the right area can be won. The big hit attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20. Recently, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger in size, and various members such as the big hit attacker unit 500 are provided in the play area. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16 in order to arrange the liquid crystal display device in 20.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a special winning opening switch 541 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, 15) of game balls from the payout device 340. The game balls paid out from the payout device 340 are paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout opening 63) through the payout opening 61.

The special electric auditors product 600 includes a shutter 610 that can open and close the special winning opening 540 by operation, and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 99) that drives the shutter 610. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, so that the game ball can be won (or easily) in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 is a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating a big hit), the big hit This is performed when the game state is entered. The result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is a special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74. Is displayed by the stop display mode.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the result of the special lottery includes a small hit. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the special lottery includes both the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

The small hit prize hole 560 is opened by operating the small hit shutter 562 when the small hit game is executed in the small hit game state. A small hit winning opening solenoid 520 is arranged on the small hit shutter 562 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball is won in the small hit winning hole 560, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit winning hole switch 521. When a game ball is detected in the small hit winning opening switch 521, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, 15) of game balls from the payout device 340. The game balls paid out from the payout device 340 are paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout opening 63) through the payout opening 61.

In the second embodiment, the same small hit winning opening 560 is opened when the result of the first special lottery is “small hit” and when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit”. When the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the opening time of the winning port for small win 560 to, for example, 500 msec, and the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". If there is, the opening time of the small hit winning port 560 is set to, for example, 1800 msec.

In addition, the opening time of the small hit winning opening 560 is limited to the above when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" and when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". However, according to the gist of the present invention, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", it is used for the small hit rather than when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit". It is preferable to open the small hitting prize opening 560 in such a manner that the game balls can easily win, for example, by increasing the opening time of the winning opening 560.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the common small winning a prize hole 560 is used when the result of the first special lottery is “small hit” and when the result of the second special lottery is “small hit”. Although it is open, it is not limited to this, and different attackers may be opened depending on whether the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" and the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". You can

The first start opening 420 gives a trigger for a hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) of a game ball, and a trigger for displaying a result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display portion 73 described later. Is to give. A first starting port switch 421 is provided at the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421. When the game ball is detected in the first starting opening switch 421, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, three) of game balls from the payout device 340, and hits the first special symbol. Judgment (big hit judgment, small hit judgment) is performed. The game balls paid out from the payout device 340 are paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout opening 63) through the payout opening 61. It should be noted that the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is performed by left-handing in principle.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower part of the approximate center of the game area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives a trigger for the hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) of the game ball, and a trigger for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display portion 74 described later. Is to give. A second starting port switch 441 is provided at the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 under a predetermined condition, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, one) of game balls from the payout device 340, and at the same time, the second Performs a special symbol hit judgment (large hit judgment, small hit judgment). The game balls paid out from the payout device 340 are paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout opening 63) through the payout opening 61. The second starting port 440 is always difficult or impossible to win a game ball by closing a blade member 4622 described later, but when the blade member 4622 is open, it is easy to win a game ball. .. In principle, a game ball is won in the second starting opening 440 by hitting left.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a pair of left and right vane members 4622 that are rotatable in the left-right direction, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 99), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 to the vane member 4622. (Not shown). The normal electric accessory 460 can be moved (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly pass by driving the blade member 4622 by the starting opening solenoid 4630. Is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4622 while the blade member 4622 is driven, the game ball wins the second starting opening 440. The opening/closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (vane member 4622) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display portion 71 is in a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating a normal hit). Be seen.

The passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for ordinary symbol determination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ordinary winning determination") on the condition that the game ball is won (passed). The passage gate 49 is arranged immediately above the first starting opening 420, and is configured so that all the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting opening 420. However, all the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 are not necessarily limited to the configuration that passes through the first starting opening 420, and most of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 are the first starting opening 420. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some small game balls do not enter the first starting opening 420.

Further, the passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 491 (see FIG. 99). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491. When the game ball is detected in the passage gate switch 491, the main CPU 101 normally makes a hit determination of the symbol. The game ball is passed to the pass gate 49 by left-handing.

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are arranged on the lower left and lower right of the game board unit 17, and when a game ball wins the general winning opening 53, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531. It When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 340, and the upper plate 26 (or the payout port 63 is moved downward through the payout opening 61). It is dispensed (discharged) to the plate 27). The general winning opening switch may be provided as a switch common to a plurality of general winning openings, and each of the general winning openings can be detected so as to detect which one of the plurality of general winning openings has won. It may be provided corresponding to.

In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting opening 420 is 3, the number of prize balls in the second starting opening 440 is 1, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 53 is 15 for small hits. The number of prize balls of the winning hole 560 is set to 15, and the number of prize balls of the special winning hole 540 is set to 15. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The outlet 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in and discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine when the launched game ball does not enter any of the starting port and the winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged on the lower right side of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 28 (see FIG. 97). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, and a first special symbol reserved display portion 75 as the various display portions. To do.

The normal symbol display portion 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric auditors product 460 to be in the open state according to the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is normally displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary symbol”), the combination of turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (normal hit), it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, The closed mode in which it is difficult to win the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is changed to the mode in which the prize is easily won.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of the determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the game state is determined by the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is a big hit, a combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (starting winning) and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, is determined. In the second embodiment, the hit determination includes hit determination based on winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 and hit determination based on winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 440. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is shifted to the big hit game state in which it is executed for a predetermined number of rounds, and when the result of the hit determination is a small hit. Shifts to the small hit game state in which the small hit game is executed in which the small hit winning opening 560 is opened.

The 1st special symbol hold display section 75 displays the number of executions of the variable display of the 1st special symbol that has been held (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number of the variable display of the 1st special symbol"). The first special symbol reserved display portion 75 includes display LEDs 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d. The 1st special symbol reservation display section 75 displays the number of variable display reservations of the 1st special symbol by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a, 75b, 75c, 75d.

Although the details will be described later, the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, the main CPU 101 determines, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 440, whether or not the second starting port winning is valid, and if the second starting port winning is not valid, the second starting is performed. Even if the random number values (random number value for jackpot determination and symbol random number values) described later are extracted (acquired) based on the winning of the mouth 440, they are discarded, and these random number values are provided for the second special lottery described later. Never. The conditions for determining that the second starting opening winning is valid will be described later.

[2-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The main difference between FIG. 99 and FIG. 9 is that, for example, in FIG. 9, the small hit winning opening solenoid 520 and the small hit winning opening switch 521 are not connected to the main control circuit 100, whereas in FIG. In addition to being connected to the circuit 100, in FIG. 9, the normal symbol hold display section 72 and the second special symbol hold display section 76 are connected to the main control circuit 100, whereas in FIG. 99 these are the main controls. That is, it is not connected to the circuit 100.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch control circuit 300. , And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state. Although the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101 in the second embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data of the special symbol game.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I/O port 105 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and sends output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 sends a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 during power interruption (power OFF).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, in the main control circuit 100, the normal symbol display portion 71, the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74, the first special symbol reserved display portion 75, the blade member of the normal electric auditors product 460. A starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving 4622, a special winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. In addition, in the main control circuit 100, in order to send data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and the like, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 used is connected.

Further, in the main control circuit 100, a first starting port switch 421, a second starting port switch 441, a passage gate switch 491, a small hit winning opening switch 521, a big winning opening switch 541, a general winning opening switch 531, a performance display. A monitor 334 and the like are connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power interruption according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade. Unlike the first embodiment, the normal symbol hold display section and the second special symbol hold display section do not exist as a configuration, but are connected to the main control circuit 100 so that various parts can be diverted to different models. Instead, the normal symbol hold display section and the second special symbol hold display section may be present.

[2-1-2-1. Start information hold area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the buffer area in which the start information of the special symbol is stored until the variation start condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of a buffer area for storing start information of the main RAM 103, (A) a diagram showing one example thereof, and (B) a diagram showing another example.

In this specification, the variation start condition of the special symbol, that is, the condition that the special lottery can be executed is referred to as the variation start condition.

As shown in FIG. 100(A), the main RAM 103 has a holding area as a buffer area for storing the start information of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first start information”) until the variation start condition is satisfied. However, it does not have a holding area for storing the starting information of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second starting information"). The details will be described below.

First, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first starting opening winning is valid, and if the first starting opening winning is valid, the first starting information is displayed. Save to the holding area. If the first start winning combination is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number (three in the second embodiment) of game balls as prize balls, but saves the acquired first start information in the reserved area. Discard without discarding. However, the first start information may not be acquired when the first start mouth winning is not valid.

The holding area is an area for storing the first starting information until the variation start condition is satisfied, and the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area are set so that up to four pieces can be held. Has an area.

The first starting mouth winning is determined to be valid if the condition that the first starting information can be stored in one or more holding areas among the first holding area to the fourth holding area is satisfied. For example, the first holding area -When the first starting information is stored in all of the fourth holding areas and there is no free space, it is determined that the first starting information is not valid.

When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 transfers the first start information stored in the first holding area to a fluctuation starting area (not shown) different from the holding area in the main RAM 103. The fluctuation start area is an area for storing the start information provided for the special lottery when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the first start information is stored in the variation start area, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery using the first start information stored in the variation start area, and the first special lottery is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the result.

The variation start condition is a condition that is satisfied when the special lottery and the variation display of the special symbol can be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, at least during the jackpot gaming state ( It does not hold during the small hit game state (including the interval) or during the variable display of the special symbol (including the interval).

As described above, there is no area for storing the second starting information acquired by winning the game ball into the second starting opening 440. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning is valid, and if the second starting opening winning is valid, the acquired second starting information is obtained. , Is stored in the fluctuation start area described above. If the second start winning combination is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number (one in the second embodiment) of game balls as prize balls, but stores the acquired second start information in the variation start area. Discard without doing. However, the second starting information may not be acquired when the second starting mouth winning is not valid.

The second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid only when the variation start condition is satisfied.

When the second start information is stored in the variation start area, the main CPU 101 uses the second start information stored in the variation start area to perform the second special lottery, and the result of the second special lottery. Based on, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

The main CPU 101 can determine whether the starting information stored in the variation start area is the first starting information or the second starting information.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100(B), another example of the buffer area in which the start information of the special symbol is stored until the variation start condition is satisfied will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100(B), the main RAM 103 has a holding area for storing the first start-up information until the variation start condition is satisfied, and a temporary storage for temporarily storing the second start-up information although there is no holding function. And a region. The processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 is the same as that in FIG. 100A, but the processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is shown in FIG. Different from A).

When the game ball wins the second starting opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning is valid (that is, whether or not the variation start condition is satisfied), and the second starting opening winning is performed. Is valid, the second start information is stored in the temporary storage area. If the second starting prize is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number (one in the second embodiment) of game balls as prize balls, but saves the acquired second starting information in the temporary storage area. Discard without doing.

When the second startup information is stored in the temporary storage area, the main CPU 101 stores the first startup information stored in the first holding area in the temporary storage area, similarly to the process of transferring the first startup information to the variation start area. The process of transferring the second starting information stored in the variable start area is performed.

When the first start information is stored in the variation start area, the main CPU 101 executes the variation display of the first special lottery and the first special symbol by using the first start information, and the first variation is displayed in the variation start area. When the 2 start information is stored, the second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed by using the second start information. Thereby, the process of transferring the second start information stored in the temporary storage area to the fluctuation start region and the process of transferring the first start information stored in the first holding region to the fluctuation start region are made common. Therefore, the control load can be reduced.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the holding area in which the first starting information is stored, and the first starting information or the second starting information is the buffer area of the main RAM 103, but it is not always the main RAM 103. Is not limited to having the holding area and the fluctuation start area, and for example, the memory built in the main CPU 101 may have the holding area and the fluctuation start area, and one of these may be the main RAM 103. May be used as the buffer area and the other may be used as the area of the memory built in the main CPU 101.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the first starting mouth winning is valid, the first starting information is held in the holding area, and it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid. When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, it is determined to be valid only when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. That is, the first starting information is held, but the second starting information is not put on hold. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing by the main CPU 101 when it is determined that the first starting mouth winning is valid may be the same as when the second starting mouth winning is determined to be valid. That is, it is configured such that neither the first start information nor the second start information is held, and even if a game ball is won in the first start opening 420, the main CPU 101 does not change when the variation start condition is satisfied. As long as it is determined that the first starting opening winning is valid.

[2-2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. 101 is different from FIG. 10 in that in FIG. 10, the big hit determination is not performed as the hit determination processing, but in FIG. 101, the big hit determination and the small hit determination are performed as the hit determination processing.

As shown in FIG. 101, a pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When the "big hit" or "small hit" in the special symbol game or the "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility of winning the game ball relatively increases, and the payout of the game ball The control process is facilitated.

In addition, in various prizes, a special symbol starting prize which is one condition for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol game It also includes a normal symbol starting prize.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various kinds of start information (eg, big hit determination random number value, symbol random number value, etc.) from various counters (eg, big hit determination counter or symbol determination counter). A random number value) is extracted (obtained). When the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, if the first starting mouth winning is valid, the extracted first starting information is stored in the holding area, and if the first starting winning is not valid, it is extracted. The first start information is discarded. Further, when the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, if the second starting mouth prize is valid, the extracted second starting information is stored in the variation start area, and if the second starting mouth prize is not valid. The extracted second starting information is discarded without being stored (see the flow of the special symbol starting winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 101).

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, for example, whether or not a big hit game state, whether a small hit game is not in progress, whether variable display of special symbols is not being executed, and the like, whether or not certain conditions are satisfied. If it is determined that these constant conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the hit determination process (special lottery) of the special symbol is performed. In this special lottery, a random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination of a special symbol is performed (first, a jackpot determination of whether or not to be a "jackpot" is performed, If not, a small hit determination is made as to whether or not to make a "small hit"). Then, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the hit determination of the special symbol described above are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Then, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the random number for the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Is referred to, and the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the special symbol is determined. The variation pattern of the special symbol will be described in detail later, but the variation pattern table number is set with reference to the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107 described later), and the variation pattern corresponding to the set variation pattern table number. It is determined by referring to the table (see FIG. 108 described later).

Then, the variable display control process ends, and when the special symbol is displayed in a mode showing "big hit", the big hit game control process controlled to the big hit game state is executed. Also, when the variable display control process ends and the mode showing "small hit" is displayed, the small hit game control process controlled to the small hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the possibility of the various prizes described above increases. On the other hand, when neither the mode showing “big hit” nor the mode showing “small hit” is displayed, neither the big hit game control process nor the small hit game control process is executed.

When the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process is finished, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state to the non-specific game state is performed. In the game state after the transition by this game state transition control processing, management of a non-specific game state that is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is performed.

As the non-specific game state, for example, in the above-described jackpot determination, a gaming state that is determined to be a "big hit" with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal gaming state") or a probability that is determined to be a "big hit" is normal. A gaming state that increases more than the gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "high-probability gaming state"), a control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 or a control related to the variation time of the special symbol is changed (hereinafter, "time saving game"). "State") and the like. Then, as the next game, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, for example, when the game ball wins the start when the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is extracted at the time of the start winning. The first start information (random number value for jackpot determination, symbol random value, etc.) that is stored is stored until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. In this way, storing the first start information until the variation start condition is satisfied is referred to as "holding".

That is, when the game ball enters the first start opening 420 when the variation start condition is not satisfied, the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the start winning is suspended and is currently executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held is sequentially started. Below, the 1st starting information about the 1st special design currently held is also called a "holding ball."

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, two types of special symbol start prize (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, but when the game ball wins the first start mouth 420 Only, it is possible to suspend the execution of variable display of the first special symbol up to a maximum of four. On the other hand, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended.

Although not shown in FIG. 101, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball is a win (whether or not a “big hit” is won) based on the information on the reserved ball described above, and further It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a prefetch effect function.

(2) If there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 101) Refer to the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. To determine.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination of whether or not the "normal hit" is performed is performed. After that, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Then, the result of the determined normal hit determination, and the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed.

When the variable display control process is completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "normal hit", the normal hit game control process for playing the normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the various prizes described above, particularly the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. When it is determined that the "normal hit" is not achieved, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the "normal hit" occurs in the ordinary symbol game The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as a method of extracting various random number values, a soft random number method of generating a random number value within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a random number generator in which random numbers are updated in a predetermined cycle, a random number value from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting the above may be adopted as the above-mentioned various random number value extraction method.

In the case of using the hard random number method, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[2-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. 102 is an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit and a small hit of a pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 103 is an example of a special symbol determination table in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 104 is an example of each gaming state in a non-specific gaming state. Table for, Figure 105 is an example of a jackpot symbol determination table when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine is a big hit, Figure 106 is a small hit when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine is a small hit An example of a symbol determination table, FIG. 107 is an example of a variation pattern table number setting table of a special symbol in a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 108 is an example of a variation pattern table (variation time determination table) of a special symbol in a pachinko gaming machine. Tables such as a special symbol determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, a variation pattern table number setting table, and a variation pattern table are stored in the main ROM 102, including a hit random number determination table (not shown). The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment are different from those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, and will be described below.

In describing the probability of the big hit and the small hit shown in FIG. 102, first, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 99 (same below)) detects the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, eg, FIG. 97), it extracts a random number from the normal hit determination counter and uses the extracted random number. Normal hit determination is performed, and variable display (variable display) of normal symbols is performed based on the result of this normal hit determination. Although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, the probability of being “normal hit” in the normal hit determination (hereinafter referred to as “normal hit probability”) is about 100%. Moreover, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the extracted random numbers are discarded, and the normal hit determination and the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol are not suspended. However, the normal hit probability is not limited to about 100%, and may be 100% or 95%, for example. Further, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal hit determination and the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol may be suspended. In addition, the extraction of the random number and the normal hit determination are performed during the variable display of the special symbol, the big hit game state, and the small hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, all the gaming balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 are configured to win the first starting opening 420.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97), that is, the passage of the game ball into the first starting opening switch 421, the big hit determination of the first special symbol from the big hit determination counter First start information such as a random number for use is extracted, and if the first start mouth winning is valid, the extracted first start information is stored in the reserved area. Then, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the first start information stored in the first holding area of the holding area is transferred (stored) to the fluctuation starting area, and the random number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 103 is stored. Referring to the determination table (not shown), the first special lottery using the first start information (first special symbol big hit determination and small hit determination) is performed. On the other hand, if the first starting mouth winning is not valid, the main CPU 101 discards the extracted first starting information. The extraction of the first start information is performed even when the game is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, but the extracted first start information is held until the variation start condition is satisfied, The variation display of the first special lottery and the first special symbol is executed based on the satisfaction of the first start start condition.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97), that is, the passage of the game ball to the second starting port switch 441, the jackpot determination counter causes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol. The second starting information such as a random number for use is extracted. If the second start winning is valid, the main CPU 101 stores the extracted second start information in the variation start area without holding it, and the second random number hit random number determination table stored in the main RAM 103 ( (Not shown), the second special lottery using the second start information (big hit determination and small hit determination of the second special symbol) is performed. On the other hand, if the second start winning combination is not valid, the main CPU 101 discards the extracted second start information. That is, the extraction of the second start information is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, during the variable display of the second special symbol, even when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled. In this case, the second starting prize is not valid, and thus the extracted second starting information is discarded without being offered to the second special lottery.

When the first special lottery is carried out, it is determined to be one of "big hit", "small win" and "miss". Further, even when the second special lottery is performed, it is determined to be one of “big hit”, “small win” and “miss”. The hit random number determination table of the first special symbol and the hit random number determination table of the second special symbol (neither are shown) stored in the main ROM 102, respectively, are values of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or The range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination that is determined to be "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" for each "1 (=on)", and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data") , "Small hit judgment value data" and "Loss judgment value data").

In the second embodiment, the total random number of the random numbers for jackpot determination is 8192 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random numbers are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 8191. This range is set as a fixed value. The big hit probability is determined by the number of big hit determination value data for the range of the big hit determination random numbers, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the range of the big hit determination random numbers. The range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate, and may be generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535, for example.

The probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1" (probability variation flag ON), and when it is "low probability game state", the probability variation flag is "0" (probability variation flag OFF). ).

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1" (time saving flag ON), and when it is "non-time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0" (time saving flag OFF). Becomes In the time saving game state, the number of times saved is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the number of times saved is reduced by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, the main CPU 101, in the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is ON and in the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is OFF, the control time relating to the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the variation time of the special symbol. The control involved is different. As the control relating to the ordinary electric auditors product 460, for example, at least one or more of the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary hit probability, the time saving game state to the extent that the appearance cannot be understood. And the non-time saving game state. Further, as the control relating to the variation time of the special symbol, for example, the average of the variation time of the special symbol is made different between the time saving game state and the non-time saving game state.

However, in the time saving game state and the non-time saving game state, it is not essential to make both the control related to the normal electric auditors product 460 and the control related to the variation time of the special symbol different. For example, in the time saving game state and the non-time saving game state, a) the control related to the normal electric auditors product 460 may be the same, and only the control related to the variation time of the special symbol may be different, or b) the normal electric operation. The control relating to the accessory 460 may be different, and the control relating to the variation time of the special symbol may be the same, or c) the control relating to the ordinary electric accessory 460 (the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the variation of the ordinary symbol) It is also possible to make the control of only a part of the above (time, probability of normal hit, etc.) different. In the case of (c) above, the control relating to the variation time of the special symbol may be the same or different between the time saving game state and the non-time saving game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the special winning opening 540 is controlled to be opened for a predetermined number of rounds, a big hit gaming state, and a small hit winning opening 560 is controlled to be opened. It controls to a non-specific game state which is neither a gaming state nor a big hit game state and a small hit game state. In the non-specific game state, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the normal gaming state, the probability variation flag ON and the time saving flag ON are highly accurate short time gaming state, and the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag ON is low accurate time saving game. There is a state and a high-probability non-time saving game state in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, and the main CPU 101, in the non-specific game state, the normal game state, the high accuracy short time gaming state, the low accuracy short time gaming state and the high accuracy non Control to any one of the time saving game states. Details of each game state in the non-specific game state will be described later.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97) and extracts the first starting information such as the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the first starting opening winning is achieved. It is determined whether or not it is valid, and if the first start opening winning is valid, the extracted first start information is held as the first start information until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the first special lottery is performed, and it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Further, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected and the first starting information is extracted, if the first starting opening winning is not effective, the extracted first starting is performed. Discard without holding information (also not used in the first special lottery).

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97) and extracts the second starting information such as the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the second starting port winning is achieved. It is determined whether or not it is valid, and if the second winning opening winning is valid, a second special lottery using the extracted second starting information is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In the second embodiment, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be “miss” is extremely small (for example, 1 in 8192). However, instead of this, the result of the second special lottery may not include "miss" (that is, the probability of the result of the second special lottery being "miss" may be 0). Further, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected and the second starting information is extracted, if the second starting opening winning is not effective, the extracted second starting is performed. Discard the information without using it in the second special lottery.

[2-3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 102, in the first special lottery, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value that is set. When the normal gaming state or the low-probability short-time gaming state (probability variation flag OFF) in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, the jackpot probability for each set value is 26/8192 (about 1/315) in setting 1, and setting 2 27/8192 (about 1/303) with setting 3, 28/8192 (about 1/293) with setting 3, 29/8192 (about 1/282) with setting 4, 30/8192 with setting 5 (About 1/273), and the setting 6 is 31/8192 (about 1/264). When the high-probability short-time gaming state or the high-probability non-time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON) is relatively high in the jackpot probability, the jackpot probability for each set value is 130, 8,192 in setting 1 (about 63 minutes). 1), setting 2 is 135/8192 (about 1/61), setting 3 is 140/8192 (about 1/59), setting 4 is 145/8192 (about 1/56), setting 5 It is 150/8192 (about 1/55), and the setting 6 is 155/8192 (about 1/53). The small hit probability is common regardless of whether or not the probability variation flag is ON and the set value, and is 25/8192 (about 1/328) and the big hit probability when the probability variation flag is OFF. It has almost the same probability. However, the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

Further, also in the second special lottery, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value that is set. Specifically, in a normal game state or a low-probability short-time short game state (probability variation flag OFF) in which the jackpot probability is relatively low, the jackpot probability for each set value is 26/1922/26 (about 315 minutes) in the setting 1. 1), setting 2 is 27/1922 (about 1/303), setting 3 is 28/1922 (about 1/293), setting 4 is 29/1922 (about 282/1/2), setting 5 Is 30/8192 (about 1/273), and setting 6 is 31/8192 (about 1/264). When the high-probability short-time gaming state or the high-probability non-time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON) is relatively high in the jackpot probability, the jackpot probability for each set value is 130, 8,192 in setting 1 (about 63 minutes). 1), setting 2 is 135/8192 (about 1/61), setting 3 is 140/8192 (about 1/59), setting 4 is 145/8192 (about 1/56), setting 5 It is 150/8192 (about 1/55), and the setting 6 is 155/8192 (about 1/53). The small hit probability is common regardless of whether or not the probability variation flag is ON and the set value, and is 8036/8192 (about 1.02/1/2). However, as shown in FIG. 102, the small hit probability of the second special lottery is significantly different from the small hit probability of the first special lottery.

The first special lottery and the second special lottery have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are the same. For example, with setting 3, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery is 28/8192 when the probability variation flag is OFF (140/8192 when the probability variation flag is ON), and the jackpot probability is the second special jackpot. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the lottery (28/8192 when the probability variation flag is OFF, 140/8192 when the probability variation flag is ON). However, the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

Also, in the second embodiment, the setting value has six levels of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be six levels, and can be arbitrarily set as long as there are a plurality of levels, and further, one level. May be.

[2-3-1. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 103 is an example of the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 as described above. The special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol), the random number value of the symbol and the above-mentioned determination value data acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. Based on this, reference is made to determine the "hit selection symbol command" and the "designation command" that determine the stop symbol. "Hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol that is determined according to the hit type when it is a big hit or a small hit, and the "design symbol command" is displayed when the special symbol fluctuation stops. It is a command for designating the symbol to be drawn. The symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

In the special symbol determination table of the second embodiment (first special symbol), when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "19", the main CPU 101 The winning selection symbol command is determined to be "z0" (selection probability of "z0": 20/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA1". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "20" to "39", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z1" (" z1" selection probability: 20/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "51", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z2" (" z2" selection probability: 12/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "52" to "58", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z3" (" z3" selection probability: 7/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "59" to "64", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z4" (" z4” selection probability: 6/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be “zA2”. Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "65" to "79", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to be "z5" (" z5" selection probability: 15/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "80" to "89", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z6" (" z6" selection probability: 10/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "90" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z7" (" z7" selection probability: 10/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA3".

In the special symbol determination table (first special symbol), when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the random symbol value is any of "0" to "3", the main CPU 101 hits The time selection symbol command is determined to be "z8" (selection probability of "z8": 4/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the random symbol value is any one of "4" to "7", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to be "z9" ( Selection probability of "z9": 4/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "8" to "11", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z10" ( Selection probability of "z10": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of “12” to “15”, the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be “z11” ( Selection probability of “z11”: 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be “zA4”. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any of "16" to "19", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z12" ( Selection probability of "z12": 4/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of “20” to “23”, the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be “z13” ( Selection probability of "z13": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "24" to "27", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z14" ( Selection probability of "z14": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "28" to "31", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z15" ( Selection probability of "z15": 4/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "32" to "35", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z16" ( Selection probability of “z16”: 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be “zA4”. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "36" to "39", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z17" ( Selection probability of "z17": 4/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA5". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z18" ( Selection probability of "z18": 60/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA6".

In addition, in the special symbol determination table (first special symbol), when the loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 101 does not determine any winning selection symbol command, and determines the symbol designation command to "zA7". To do.

In the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the random symbol value is any one of "0" to "54", the main CPU 101 determines that The selected symbol command is determined to be "z19" (selection probability of "z19: 55/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "55" to "59", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z20" (" z20" selection probability: 5/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "60" to "62", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z21" (" z21" selection probability: 3/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "63" to "64", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z22" (" z22" selection probability: 2/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of “65” to “79”, the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be “z23” (“ z23" selection probability: 15/100), the symbol designating command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of “80” to “89”, the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be “z24” (“ z24" selection probability: 10/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "90" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit time selection symbol command to be "z25" (" z25" selection probability: 10/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3".

Further, in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the small hit determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 101, even if the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the winning The time selection symbol command is determined to be "z26" (selection probability of "z26": 100/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA8".

In addition, in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the loss determination value data is obtained, the main CPU 101 does not determine any winning selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command is "zA9". To decide.

[2-3-2. Each game state in non-specific game state]
Here, each gaming state in the non-specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a table for explaining an example of each game state in the non-specific game state as described above. The specific game state shown in FIG. 104 includes a normal game state, a high-accuracy time short game state, a low-accuracy time short game state, and a high-accuracy non-time short game state. Hereinafter, these four gaming states will be referred to as gaming states (major categories).

As shown in FIG. 104, when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major classification) to the normal gaming state. When the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major category) to the highly accurate time saving gaming state. Further, when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major category) to the low accuracy time saving gaming state. When the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major classification) to the highly accurate non-time saving gaming state.

In the above normal gaming state, as a gaming state (middle classification), a low game state (hereinafter referred to as “LG state”) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is the lowest in the normal gaming state. ) And a high game state (hereinafter referred to as “HG state”) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is higher than LG. However, even in the HG state, the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is smaller than 1.

Further, in the above-mentioned HG state, as a game state (small classification), the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time of the number of award balls is the highest in the normal game state in the big high game state (hereinafter referred to as “BHG state”). "), the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is lower than the BHG state, but higher than the LG state. A middle-high game state (hereinafter referred to as "MHG state"), and firing per unit time. There is a small high game state (hereinafter referred to as “SHG state”) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls is lower than MHG but higher than the LG state. It should be noted that which of the BHG state, the MHG state and the SHG state is controlled as the game state (small classification) is determined by a game mode described later. For example, when the winning selection symbol command shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) wins the small hit of “z8”, the main CPU 101 sets the game mode to 8 after the small hit game state ends. Set and control to SHG state until 100 times of game (variable display of special symbol) is executed after the small hit game state ends. In addition, when the winning selection symbol command shown in the small hit symbol determination table wins the small hit of "z13", the main CPU 101 sets the game mode to 13 after the small hit game state is finished, and the small hit. After the game state is finished, the SHG state is controlled until 10 times of games are executed, then the MHG state is controlled until 10 times of games are executed, and then BHG until 10 times of games are executed. Control the state.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 has an expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time in the BHG state of approximately 90%, and an expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time in the MHG state of the expected value. It is controlled so that the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time in the SHG state is about 70% and about 50%. As will be described later in detail, the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time of shot balls is realized by changing the frequency of control in the small hitting game state. Needless to say, the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is set as a normal game state (major category) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1. By providing multiple game states with different expected values of the number of balls (LG state, HG state (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state)), it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is set as the normal game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is less than 1. In addition to the smallest LG state, there are three HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is different, but the number of HG states is The number is not necessarily three and may be only one or two, or may be four or more. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

In the high-probability time short game state and the low-probability time short game state, they are not classified into middle or small classification game states. In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time in the high-accuracy-time short game state and the low-accuracy short-time game state to 30% to 50% higher than that in the LG state. To control. However, in the high-accuracy time short game state or the low-accuracy time short game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the number of prize balls is not increased by changing the frequency controlled to the small hitting game state, for example, the second starting opening 440. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball is won is increased to approximately 100% (eg 95 ˜100%).

When the time saving game is exhausted in the low-probability time saving game state (when the time saving counter becomes 0), the probability variation flag is turned off and the time saving flag is turned off, so the main CPU 101 controls the HG state or the LG state according to the game mode. ..

Further, in the high-probability non-time saving game state, the main CPU 101 raises the frequency of being controlled to the small hitting game state higher than the HG state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is more than 1 rush. The game state (hereinafter referred to as “RG state”) is controlled.

In the second embodiment, as shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the HG counter is set to 100000. Therefore, in the highly accurate non-time saving game state, The RG state will continue unless a "big hit" is won and the game mode is set again. That is, in the second embodiment, the highly accurate non-time saving game state and the RG state have the same meaning. In this way, once the RG state is controlled, the RG state continues until the "big hit" is won. Therefore, the payout is made during one RG state from when the RG state is controlled until the RG state ends. There is a possibility that the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than the number of prize balls to be paid out during one big hit game state from when the big hit game state is controlled to when the big hit game state ends. Moreover, in the case of winning the big hit in which the probability variation flag is turned ON in the game state after the big hit game state is finished, the RG state is controlled immediately after the big hit game state is finished or after the shortening game is exhausted, The RG state is a gaming state that may be more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state.

When the time saving game is exhausted in the high-accuracy time saving game state (when the time saving counter becomes 0), the probability variation flag is turned on and the time saving flag is turned off. As shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), the probability variation flag is set to ON after the jackpot gaming state is ended. When the "bonus" is won, the HG counter is set to 100000 (hall) Since the HG counter does not become 0 during the business hours of), when the time saving game is exhausted in the high-accuracy time saving game state, the main CPU 101 always controls the high accuracy non-time saving game state, that is, the RG state. Become. The HG counter is set to 100000 when the probability variation flag is set to ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be distinguished as another counter. In this case, the ST counter may be set to 100000 and the HG counter may be set to 0 when the probability variation flag is set to ON.

[2-3-3. Big hit symbol determination table]
FIG. 105 is an example of the jackpot symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, as described above. When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit symbol determination table, and according to the hit selection symbol command, the number of rounds, the big hit game is over, and the non-specific game state is entered. In the game state, whether or not the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are turned on, the time saving number, the game mode, and the HG counter are set. The "Game progression pattern" column in FIG. 105 is shown for the sake of clarity. Further, the column of "selection rate" in FIG. 105 shows the selection rate of each hit selection symbol command decided with reference to FIG.

Incidentally, the game mode, as shown in a variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107) described later, when determining the variation pattern table number of the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol It is a mode used for, as shown in the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105) and the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) described later, it is determined according to the hit time selection symbol command.

Further, the HG counter is a counter that manages the number of games until the HG state or the RG state shifts to the LG state (the HG state, the RG state and the LG state will be described later), and the game (variable display of special symbols) Is subtracted each time is executed. However, the HG counter and a time saving counter, which will be described later, are not subtracted at the same time, and even if the game is executed, the HG counter is not subtracted when the time saving flag is ON, and the time saving flag is reduced. Only when the game is off, the HG counter is decremented when the game is executed.

In the big hit symbol determination table of the second embodiment (first special symbol), when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 101, the number of rounds 10, probability variation flag ON, time saving flag OFF (time saving number 0) , Game mode 1, HG counter 100000 is set (this big hit is hereinafter referred to as "MAX big hit"). In this case, after the 10R big hit game state is over, the game immediately shifts to the RG state without playing the time saving game. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time saving flag OFF (time saving number 0), the game mode 1, and the HG counter 100000 (this big hit is referred to as " RUSH jackpot"). In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R is finished, the game is immediately shifted to the RG state without playing the time saving game. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is “z2”, the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time saving flag ON, the time saving number 4, the game mode 2, and the HG counter 100000. 4 times RUSH jackpot"). In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R is finished, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the RG state is entered. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time saving flag ON, the number of time saving 24, the game mode 3, and the HG counter 100000 (this big hit is referred to as "time saving hereinafter. 24 times RUSH jackpot"). In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R ends, the time saving game is executed 24 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time saving flag ON, the time saving number 54, the game mode 4, and the HG counter 100000 (this big hit is referred to as "time saving hereinafter. 54 times RUSH jackpot"). In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed 54 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, the time saving number 4, the game mode 5, and the HG counter 0 (hereinafter, this big hit is referred to as "time saving. It is called "4 times normal big hit"). In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the LG state is entered.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, the time saving time 4, the game mode 6, and the HG counter 100 (hereinafter, this big hit is referred to as "time saving. 4th SHG jackpot"). In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the SHG state (maximum 100 times) is entered. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, the SHG state ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, the time saving number 4, the game mode 7, and the HG counter 100 (hereinafter, this big hit is referred to as "time saving. 4 times BHG jackpot"). In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the BHG state (maximum 100 times) is entered. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, the BHG state ends.

Further, in the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the winning selection symbol command is "z19", the main CPU 101, the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving flag OFF (time saving number 0), game mode 1. Set the HG counter 100000 (RUSH jackpot). In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R is finished, the game is immediately shifted to the RG state without playing the time saving game. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z20", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving flag ON, time saving number 4, game mode 2, HG counter 100000 (time saving 4 times RUSH big hit) .. In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R is finished, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the RG state is entered. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z21", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving flag ON, time saving number 24, game mode 3, HG counter 100000 (time saving 24 times RUSH big hit) .. In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R ends, the time saving game is executed 24 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z22", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving flag ON, time saving number 54, game mode 4, HG counter 100000 (time saving 54 times RUSH big hit) .. In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed 54 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until the big hit is won, and does not end even if the small win is won.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z23", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, the time saving time 4, the game mode 5, and the HG counter (4 times saving time normal big hit). In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the LG state is entered.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z24", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, the time saving number 4, the game mode 6, and the HG counter 100 (time saving 4 times SHG big hit). .. In this case, after the big hit game state of 4R ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the SHG state (maximum 100 times) is entered. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, the SHG state ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z25", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag OFF, time saving flag ON, time saving number 4, game mode 7, HG counter 100 (time saving 4 times BHG big hit) .. In this case, after the 4R big hit game state ends, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the BHG state (maximum 100 times) is entered. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, the BHG state ends.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, depending on the big hit symbol (hit symbol command), the gaming state controlled after the big hit gaming state is different, but the big hit symbol (hit symbol selected) The command) is not limited to the number shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (FIG. 105). For example, instead of or in addition to the jackpot design (hit selection symbol command) of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (FIG. 105), a prescribed number of times (hereinafter, “ceiling game number”). After the game (referred to as) (variable display of special symbols) is executed, for example, a big hit symbol having a so-called ceiling function controlled in the HG state (100 times) may be provided.

As a jackpot pattern having a ceiling function, for example, after the jackpot game state is finished, the ceiling game in the LG state is 510 times → the game in the HG state is 100 times. , Probability variation flag OFF, time saving flag OFF, time saving number 0, HG counter 610), after the jackpot game state is over, "4 games in the low accuracy time shortening game state -> 510 games in the LG state ceiling game -> HG Big game symbol B (number of rounds 4, probability variation flag OFF, time saving flag ON, time saving number 4, HG counter 610) which is controlled to 100 times in a state, after the big hit game state is finished, "low probability time shortening game" The game in the state is 100 times → the ceiling game in the LG state is 510 times → the game in the HG state is 100 times" is a big hit symbol C (number of rounds 4, probability variation flag OFF, time saving flag ON, time saving 100 times) , HG counter 610) may be provided. When a big hit with a ceiling function is won in this way, it is possible to reduce the mental burden on the player even if the big hit is not achieved for a long time.

The ceiling game number may be a fixed number of times (for example, 510 times), or is determined to be a different number of times according to the hit time selection symbol command when the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, for example. For example, it may be changed according to a predetermined condition.

[2-3-4. Small hit symbol determination table]
FIG. 106 is an example of the small hit symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, as described above. When the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 refers to the small hit symbol determination table, and depending on the hit selection symbol command, the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors product 460, the game mode, and the HG counter. set. The "Game progression pattern" column in FIG. 106 is shown for the sake of clarity. In addition, the column of “selection rate” in FIG. 106 shows the selection rate of each hit selection symbol command determined with reference to FIG. 103.

In the small hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) of the second embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 8, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state ends, the state shifts to the SHG state (maximum 100 times). When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, the SHG state ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 9, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the state shifts to the MHG state (maximum 100 times). When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the MHG state, the MHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the MHG state ends, the MHG state ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 10, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state ends, the state shifts to the BHG state (maximum 100 times). When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, the BHG state ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is “z11”, the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 11, and the HG counter 110. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game progresses in a predetermined “LG state 10 times→SHG state (maximum 100 times)” game progression pattern. When the game (variable display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the SHG state of the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends and shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is “z12”, the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 12, and the HG counter 130. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game progresses in a predetermined “LG state 30 times→MHG state (maximum 100 times)” game progression pattern. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 100 times in the MHG state in the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends, and the state shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z13", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 13, and the HG counter 30. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game proceeds in a predetermined game progress pattern of “SHG state 10 times→MHG state 10 times→BHG state 10 times”. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 10 times in the last BHG state of the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends and shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z14", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 14, and the HG counter 20. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game proceeds in a predetermined game progress pattern of “SHG state 10 times→MHG state 10 times”. When the game (variable display of the special symbol) is performed 10 times in the BHG state in the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends and shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z15", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 15, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game progresses in a game progress pattern of “LG state 10 times→BHG state 10 times→LG state 10 times→BHG state 70 times”. When the game (variable display of special symbols) is performed 70 times in the BHG state of the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends, and the state shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z16", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 16, and the HG counter 20. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the game proceeds in a predetermined game progress pattern of “LG state 10 times→BHG state 10 times”. When the game (variable display of the special symbol) is performed 10 times in the BHG state in the above-mentioned game progress pattern, the game in the above-mentioned game progress pattern ends and shifts to the LG state. When the big hit or the small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progression pattern, the game in this game progression pattern ends.

The game progression pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z15" and the game progression pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z16" are halfway (LG state (10 times→BHG state 10 times, and then transition to LG state) has the same pattern.

When the winning selection symbol command is “z17”, the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 17, and the HG counter 100000. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the main CPU 101 controls to the BHG state. This BHG state can be continued until the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. However, if the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled before the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes "big hit" , The BHG state ends. If the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, and the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z17", in the BHG state after the small hit game state is finished, the first special lottery Even if the result is a “small hit”, the main CPU 101 may execute control to continue the BHG state without newly setting the HG counter. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", it is a principle that the HG counter is reset based on the hit selection symbol command, but for example, the hit selection symbol command is "z17" small. When the specific condition that the BHG state is controlled by winning the winning is satisfied, the main CPU 101 may perform control to carry over the BHG state without resetting the HG counter. In addition, even when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "small hit", when the winning selection symbol command is "z18" or "z26" (HG counter is defined If it is not “small hit”, the control for carrying over the BHG state may be performed without resetting the HG counter. In this case, it may be applied in another game mode.

When the winning selection symbol command is "z18", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 0, and the HG counter 0. In this case, after the small hitting game state ends, the LG state is immediately shifted without shifting to the RG state and the HG state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the current RG state and HG state may be maintained.

In this way, by making the game progression pattern different according to the small hit symbol (hit selection symbol command), it is possible to give variations to the game progression pattern in the normal game state, and the normal game that tends to be monotonous It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the state.

In addition, in this specification, the winning selection symbol command is called "z17", the small hit that the BHG state continues until the big hit or the small hit is won is called a super small hit, and the hit selection symbol command is "z8". Small hits such as "z9", "z10", "z13", and "z14" that immediately shift to the HG state in which the number of times is determined after the small hitting game state is finished are called first small hits. The selection symbol command is "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16", instead of moving to the HG state immediately after the small hitting game state ends, HG after performing the game in the LG state The small hit that shifts to the state is called the second small hit. In addition, a small hit that does not shift to the HG state like the winning selection symbol command "z18" is called a non-HG small hit.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, the main CPU 101 BHG until the small hit or big hit is won in the gaming state after the small hit game state ends. Although it is controlled to the state, it is not always necessary to control to the BHG state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is higher than that of the LG state like the MHG state and the SHG state. You may make it control to a state.

Also, for example, after the small hit game state is over, the first super small hit is controlled to the BHG state, the second super small hit is controlled to the MHG state, and the third super small hit is controlled to the SHG state. It is also possible to prepare a plurality of super small hits having different profit degrees for the player, and the main CPU 101 may be configured to control one of the super small hits according to the small hit symbol.

In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", that is, when the small hit determination value data is obtained in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol) of FIG. 103 (the winning selection symbol command is "26. In the case of "), the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 2 and the game mode 0, and does not set the HG counter.

[2-3-5. Variation pattern table number setting table]
FIG. 107 is an example of the fluctuation pattern table number setting table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100, as described above. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables (see FIG. 108 described later) for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol are prepared, and the fluctuation pattern table number setting table is the plurality of fluctuations described above. It is a table for determining the table number to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the pattern table.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the details will be described later, but the main CPU 101 determines whether the probability variation flag is ON or not as a result of the first special lottery (miss, small hit, big hit), and the time saving flag. Whether it is ON, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored (whether or not the first special symbol is held), the game mode, the HG counter (the remaining number of times (the notation of the "remaining number of times" is omitted) )), a random number for reach determination, and based on the information of all or a part of the hit selection symbol command, the variation pattern table number is determined.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern table number to 13 when the result of the second special lottery is a loss, and when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Determines the variation pattern table number to be 14, and when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "15".

As shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) and the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107), when the game mode is 0, the game mode is 11 and the HG counter is 100. ~109, the game mode is 12 and the HG counter is 100 to 129, the game mode is 15, and the HG counters are 70 to 79 and 90 to 99, the game mode is 16. When the HG counter is 10 to 19, the main CPU 101 controls the LG state. That is, in the LG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "3" based on the reach determination random number.

Further, when the game mode is 10 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, when the game mode is 7 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 13 and the HG counter is 0 to 9 When the game mode is 14 and the HG counter is 0 to 9, when the game mode is 15 and the HG counters are 0 to 69 and 80 to 89, the game mode is 16 and HG When the counter is 0 to 9 and the game mode is 17, the main CPU 101 controls the BHG state. That is, in the BHG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "6" based on the reach determination random number.

Further, when the game mode is 9 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 12 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 13 and the HG counter is 10 to 19 At this time, the main CPU 101 controls to the MHG state. That is, in the MHG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "5" based on the reach determination random number.

Also, when the game mode is 6 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 8 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 11 and the HG counter is 0 to 99. When the game mode is 13 and the HG counter is 20 to 29, the main CPU 101 controls the SMG state when the game mode is 14 and the HG counter is 10 to 19. That is, in the SMG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be “2” or “4” based on the reach determination random number.

In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is "small win", the small hitting prize opening 560 is opened in the opening pattern 1, and the mode of the small hit game state is the result of the first special lottery. It is the same regardless of the small hit symbol when "small hit" (the selected symbol command at the time of hit). However, for the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the game state after the small hit game state has ended, depending on the small hit symbol when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" By changing the variation pattern number of the first special symbol, it is possible to change the expected value of the length of the period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid. In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" in the gaming state after the small hit game state has ended Depending on the small hit symbol, the frequency of controlling the small hit game state can be changed based on that the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", in the gaming state after the small hit game state has ended, the small hit symbol when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" By changing the variation pattern table of the first special symbol according to, it is possible to vary the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time.

Further, in the high-probability time short game state in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and in the low accuracy time short gaming state in which the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON, the variation pattern table number is "11." Will be decided.

Further, in the high-probability non-time saving game state (RG state) in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be "12". In this case, because the variation time of the first special symbol is as short as 600 msec, when the big hit game state ends and the state immediately shifts to the RG state, even if the start information of the first special symbol is held in the holding area, The first special lottery using the starting information for holding is immediately consumed. Therefore, even if the big hit game state ends and the state immediately shifts to the RG state, it is difficult to determine that the second starting mouth winning is not valid because the first starting information is held.

In addition, in the case where the above-mentioned big hit symbols A to C are included as the big hit symbols having the ceiling function in the big hit symbol (the hit selection symbol command) of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol, the variation. The pattern table number setting table needs to be able to determine the variation pattern table number even when any of the big hit symbols A to C. For example, in the case of the big hit symbol A, depending on whether the HG counter is "0 to 99" (HG state 100 times) or "100 to 609" (ceiling game 510 times in LG state), Set the fluctuation pattern table number. In the case of the big hit symbol B, the HG counter is "0 to 99" (HG state 100 times), "100 to 609" (ceiling game in LG state 510 times), and "610 to 613". (4 times until the time is saved) is set, the fluctuation pattern table number is set. In the case of the big hit symbol C, if the HG counter is "0 to 99" (100 times in the HG state), "100 to 609" (510 times in the ceiling game in the LG state), and "610 to 709". "(100 times until shortening and shortening) is set, the fluctuation pattern table number is set.

[2-3-6. Variation pattern table]
As described above, FIG. 108 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols (variation time determination table of special symbols) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined variation pattern table number and determines the variation pattern based on the effect selection random number according to the set value. When the variation pattern is determined, the variation pattern designation command and the variation time are also determined at the same time. Note that the “effect content” column in FIG. 108 is shown for convenience of understanding, and an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. (Variation mode) and the contents of the voice (for example, the variation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 24 by the sub CPU 201 via the voice control circuit 205.

The random number range for effect selection shown in FIG. 108 is a random number provided for determining the variation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 97), and extracts the selected effect. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table number determined with reference to FIG. 107, and determines a variation pattern and a variation pattern designation command based on the effect selection random number. However, since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. The variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect contents (for example, variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 97) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201).

The reach effect A shown in FIG. 108 indicates that the result of the first special lottery may be a big hit, and the reach effect B is that the result of the first special lottery may be a small hit other than the super small hit. Reach production showing that there is a possibility, reach production C is a reach production showing that the result of the first special lottery may be a super-small hit, and reach production D is a possibility that the result of the first special lottery is a MAX jackpot. It is a reach production showing that there is.

Further, in the second embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all setting values.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing variation time and effect contents. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, the fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, the symbol designating command determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[2-4. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, among various kinds of processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be mainly described.
[2-4-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting mouth winning detection process (step S61). The starting mouth winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning in the general winning opening 53.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning the special winning opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a small hit winning opening passage detection process (step S64). In the small hit winning prize passage detection processing, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning a prize in the small winning prize opening 560.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sphere passage detector passage detection process (step S65). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game based on the fact that the passage detection of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected by the ball passage detector (not shown) ( Random number). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[2-4-2. Starting mouth winning detection processing]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the starting mouth winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting mouth winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (see FIG. 99) (step S731). When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S731), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S732. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (NO in step S731), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S738.

In step S732, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S733, the main CPU 101 extracts the second starting information (various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol and the symbol random number), and sets the payout information according to the second starting mouth winning a prize. To do. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, one prize ball is paid out based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting opening 440.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning is valid (step S734). The conditions for determining that the second starting opening prize is valid are as described above. Then, if the second start winning combination is valid (YES in step S734), the main CPU 101 stores the extracted second start information in the variation start area (step S735), and proceeds to step S736. On the other hand, if the second starting mouth winning is not valid (NO in step S734), the main CPU 101 discards the extracted second starting information without executing the processes of step S735 and step S736, and proceeds to step S738.

In step S736, the main CPU 101 sets the second special symbol variation start flag to ON. The second special symbol variation start flag is set to ON when the second starting mouth winning is effective, in order to ensure that the variable display of the second special lottery and the second special symbol is always executed. ..

In step S738, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (step S738). When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S738), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S739. When the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S738), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S739, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S732.

In step S740, the main CPU 101 extracts the first starting information (various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol and the symbol random number), and sets the payout information according to the first starting mouth winning a prize. To do. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the fact that the game balls have won in the first starting opening 420 is three.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first start mouth winning is valid (step S741). As described above, the condition for determining that the first starting opening prize is valid is that the number of holdings of the first starting opening winnings (the number of holdings of the first special symbol) is less than 4, and is 4 pieces. If there is, it is determined that the first starting mouth winning is not valid. When the first starting opening winning combination is valid (YES in step S741), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S742. When the number of reservations is 4 (NO in step S741), the main CPU 101 discards the first starting information extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and ends the starting opening winning detection process. To do.

In step S742, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening winning a prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the first starting information extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 in the holding area until the variation start condition is satisfied (step S743). Thereby, the variable display of the first special symbol regarding the extracted first starting information is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved first winning opening winning numbers (step S744). The 1st starting opening winning number increase command is a command indicating that the 1st special symbol hold number is increased by 1, and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the starting mouth winning detection processing.

When the game ball winning in the first starting opening 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 440 are detected at the same time, whichever of the setting check processing in step S732 and the setting check processing in step S739 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S738), the number of held first starting opening winnings is four (NO in step S741). Even so, the main CPU 101 discards the first starting information extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 without transmitting the reserved number overflow command of the first starting opening winning to the sub control circuit 200. Then, the starting opening winning detection process is completed. This is because the setting value suggestive effect described later can be effectively performed in the game state in which the time saving flag is OFF.

When the setting check process (see FIG. 32) described in the first embodiment is performed in the second embodiment in which the acquired second start information is not held, regardless of whether or not the second start winning is effective. , May be performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, or may be performed only when the second starting opening winning is valid.

[2-4-3. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process of FIG. 111 is different from the special symbol control process of FIG. 34, whereas the second starting information can be held in FIG. 30, but the second starting information is not held in FIG. 111. Point (especially the special symbol variation start area check process of step S1012), and, while the process related to the small hit game state is not performed in FIG. 40, the process related to the small hit game state is performed in FIG. 111. It is a point.

The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “11”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S1011). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each processing of steps S1012 to S1023, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of steps S1012 to S1023. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S1012 to S1023. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the respective processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the second start information is stored in the variation start region when the control state flag is the value (“00”) indicating the special symbol variation start region check process. If the second starting information is stored in the variation start area, the result of the second special lottery obtained in the second starting mouth winning detection process, the determination result of the stop symbol of the second special symbol, the second special Acquires the determination result of the variation pattern of the symbol and the like. When the second start information is not stored in the variation start area, the number of pending display of the variation display of the first special symbol is checked, and the result of the first special lottery obtained in the first starting mouth winning detection process, The determination result of the stop symbol of the first special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the like are acquired. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S1013) described later, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable time of the special symbol to be set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting mouth winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the second starting information is not stored in the fluctuation start area and the number of holdings of the first starting information stored in the holding area of the first special symbol is “0” (when there is no holding ball) The main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. This special symbol variation start area check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 112.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time management process (step S1013). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol described later in the control state flag. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S1014) is set, and the post-determination waiting time is set in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S1013 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S1014). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S1013 has elapsed, the special lottery It is determined whether or not the result is "big hit", and if it is determined that it is not "big hit", it is determined whether or not "small hit". When the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating a small hit start interval management process (step S1015) described later, and the small hit The waiting time is set to the time corresponding to the start interval, and the opening pattern (opening pattern of the small hit winning opening 560) corresponding to the type of the special symbol is set. For example, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106), when the result of the first special lottery is “small hit”, the main CPU 101 is relatively difficult to win a game ball, for example. When the winning pattern for small hits 560 is opened in the opening pattern 1 (for example, a maximum opening time of 500 msec) and the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", for example, it is relatively possible to win a game ball. The small hit winning port 560 is opened with an easy opening pattern 2 (for example, a maximum opening time of 1800 msec).

When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S1018) described later in the control state flag to set the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the latency timer. As described above, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval or the big hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 has elapsed, the small hit start interval management process or the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. To be done. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is neither “big hit” nor “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“11”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S1023) described later. set. That is, in this case, neither the small hit start interval management process (step S1015) nor the big hit start interval management process (step S1018) is executed, and the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. .. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

When the value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S1015) is set in the control state flag, the main CPU 101 performs the small hit start interval management process (step S1015). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 has elapsed. The variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the small winning port 560. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a small hitting attacker opening process (step S1016), which will be described later, in the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time of the small hit winning port 560. (For example, 1.8 seconds) is set in the small hit attacker opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the small hitting attacker opening processing (step S1016) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a small hit attacker opening process (step S1016). In this process, first, when the control state flag has a value (“04”) indicating the small hit attacker opening process, the small hit attacker prize counter is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (for example, 3). It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the small hit attacker opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the small hit winning opening 560. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process to the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the small hit end interval (small hit end interval time) to the waiting time timer. .. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the small hit end interval process described below is set to be executed.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed, it performs small hit end interval processing (step S1017). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process, and a value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed. ("11") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set to be executed after the processing of step S1017.

Next, when the value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S1018) is set in the control state flag, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit start interval management process (step S1018). In this process, the main CPU 101 wins the big prize when the control state flag has a value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 has elapsed. In order to open the mouth 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating a later-described special winning opening opening process (step S1019) to the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the special winning opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the after-mentioned special winning opening opening processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S1019). In this process, first, when the control status flag is a value (“07”) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the opening It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the control state flag, a value (“08”) indicating the after-big-winning-mouth remaining ball monitoring process (step S1020) described later, and sets the after-winning-mouth remaining ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this processing, after the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time set in step S1020 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing described later. Immediately before the end of the processing for opening the special winning opening, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S1020). In this processing, when the control state flag has a value (“08”) indicating the processing for monitoring the residual ball in the special winning opening and the monitoring time for remaining ball in the special winning opening has elapsed, the main CPU 101 of the special winning opening opening counter. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times of opening the special winning opening (that is, the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“09”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process (step S1021) in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1020 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“10”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval). Time) to the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit ending interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit ending interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening times, the main CPU 101 performs the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S1021). In this processing, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening when the control state flag has a value (“09”) indicating the waiting time before opening processing for special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The value of the frequency counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this processing, it is set so that the above-described special winning opening opening processing (step S1019) is executed again. In addition, immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit ending interval process (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a value (“10”) indicating that the control state flag indicates the big hit end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, the value indicating the special symbol game end process (“ 11") in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S1022.

Next, the main CPU101, if the big hit game state is finished, if the small hit game state is finished, or if the result of the special lottery is "miss", performs the special symbol game ending process (step S1023). ..

When the special symbol game ending process is the first special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 101 clears the fluctuation start region and subtracts "1" from the data indicating the number of pieces to be reserved, and ends the second special symbol game. If it is processing, the fluctuation start area is cleared. Further, when the special symbol game ending process is the first special symbol game ending process, the main CPU 101 updates the holding area of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol variation start area check process in the control state flag. That is, by this processing, after the processing of step S1023, the special symbol variation start area check processing (step S1012) described above is set to be executed. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is “miss”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “ 02" and "11" are set in this order. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), the special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), the special symbol display time management process (step S1014) and the special symbol game end process (step) S1023) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is “small hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”. , And set in the order of "03". Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), the special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), the special symbol display time management process (step S1014) and the small hit start interval management process ( The step S1015) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the shift control to the small hitting game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of "04" and "05" when the shift control to the small hitting game state is executed. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned small hit attacker opening process (step S1016), and executes the small hit game state.

In addition, during the small hitting game state, when the ending condition of the small hitting game state is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit attacker opening process (step S1016) and the small hit end interval process (step S1017) in this order at a predetermined timing, and ends the small hit game state.

In addition, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, Set in the order of "06". Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), the special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), the special symbol display time management process (step S1014) and the big hit start interval management process (step) S1018) is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “07”, “08”, and “09” when the shift control to the big hit game state is executed. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S1019), the special winning opening remaining ball monitoring process (step S1020), and the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management process (step S1021) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot gaming state is executed.

In addition, when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied during the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “07”, “08”, “10”, “11”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S1019), the special winning hole remaining ball monitoring process (step S1020), the big hit ending interval process (step S1022), and the special symbol game ending process (step S1023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order to end the jackpot gaming state.

[2-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation start area check processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start area check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol variation start area check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads out a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S1211).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol variation start area check processing (step S1212). When determining that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S1212), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start area check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S1212), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing in step S1213.

In step S1213, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol variation start flag is ON. When the main CPU 101 determines that the second special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON (YES in step S1213), the second start information is already stored in the fluctuation start area, so the process proceeds to step S1214, 2 The special symbol fluctuation start flag is set to OFF (step S1214). On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol variation start flag is not ON (NO in step S1213), the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held first start winning awards (variable display of the first special symbol) (the number of stored start information) is larger than “0”. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the holding area (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol provided in the main RAM 103. In the first holding area to the fourth holding area, the first starting information for four times is held. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is greater than “0” (YES in step S1215), the process proceeds to step S1216, and the number of held first starting mouth prizes is greater than “0”. If it is determined that there is no number (that is, the number of reserved first start winnings is "0") (NO in step S1215), the process proceeds to step S1224.

In step S<b>1216, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the reserved number of first starting mouth winning awards.

Next, in step S1217, the main CPU 101 executes a transfer process of the first start information. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data related to the first starting information stored in the first holding area to the variation start area, and also the first starting stored in the second holding area to the fourth holding area. The data related to the information is respectively shifted to the first to third holding areas. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S1218.

In step S1218, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag.

In step S1219, the main CPU 101 uses the start information stored in the variation start area to perform a special symbol winning determination process (special lottery). In this process, when the second start information is stored in the variation start area, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery using this second start information, and the first start information is stored in the variation start area. If so, the first special lottery is performed using the first start information. In this hit determination process, the main CPU 101, based on the random number value for big hit determination stored in the fluctuation start area, the hit determination table corresponding to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (Figure (Not shown) to obtain the judgment value data. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a “big hit” based on the obtained determination value data (big hit determination), and if it is not a “big hit”, determines whether it is a “small hit”. It is judged (small hit judgment), and when it is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", it is judged as "miss".

In this way, when the second special symbol fluctuation start flag is ON, the second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are always executed.

Next, in step S1220, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) corresponding to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hit selection symbol command and the symbol designation command To get Then, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a small hit, the contents of the big hit corresponding to the obtained hit time selection symbol command (the number of rounds, the probability change) by referring to the big hit symbol determination table or the small hit symbol determination table. Flag, time saving flag, time saving number, game mode, HG counter) or content of small hit (opening pattern of winning hole 560 for small hit, game mode, HG counter) is set. The main CPU 101 transmits the acquired symbol designating command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, in step S1221, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107) to determine the variation pattern table number, and the variation pattern table corresponding to the determined variation pattern table number (see FIG. 108). With reference to, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination processing will be described later.

Next, in step S1222, the main CPU 101 sets a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of step S1221 in the waiting time timer. After that, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol effect start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (step S1223), and ends the special symbol variation start area check process.

Further, in step S1224, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start area check process.

[2-4-5. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol variation start area check process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S1311, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol subjected to the hit determination process (the hit determination process in step S1219 is the first special symbol. In step S1219). If the hit determination process is the first special symbol hit determination process (YES in step S1311), the main CPU101 performs the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312), the line in step S1219. If the hit determination process is the hit determination process of the second special symbol (NO in step S1311), the main CPU101, the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315). When the variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312) or the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315) is completed, the process proceeds to step S1316, and after the process of step S1316 is performed, the special symbol variation pattern setting process is performed. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312) and the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315) will be described later.

In step S1316, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) of the variation pattern table number set in step S1312 or step S1315, and refers to the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 97), the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command, and the variation time are determined based on the random numbers for effect selection extracted from the effect selection counter when the game ball wins. For example, when the fluctuation pattern table number is set to “5”, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be the normal fluctuation A if the random number for effect selection is “40 (settings 1 and 2)”, If the production selection random number is "60 (settings 1.2)", the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined to be normal variation B, and if the production selection random number is "80 (settings 1.2)", the special symbol is The fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal fluctuation C. Since the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command, and the variation time correspond to each other, the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command, and the variation time are determined at the same time. The main CPU 101 transmits the determined variation pattern designation command to the sub control circuit 200.

[2-4-6. First special symbol fluctuation pattern table number setting process]
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. The first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S13121, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is “big hit”. If it is determined to be a "big hit" (YES in step S13121), the process proceeds to step S13122, and if it is determined not to be a "big hit" (NO in step S13121), the process proceeds to step S13125.

In step S13122, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit time selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination processing performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112) is “z0”, and the hit time selection symbol command. Is "z0" (YES in step S13122), the variation pattern table number is set to "9" (step S13123), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process ends. If the winning selection symbol command is other than "z0" (NO in step S13122), the variation pattern table number is set to "10" (step S13124), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process. To finish. Therefore, the reach effect D will function as a reach effect that confirms that the player has won the jackpot (the jackpot selection symbol command is "z0") that has the highest degree of profit for the player.

In step S13125, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is “small hit”. If it is determined to be "small hit" (YES in step S13125), the process proceeds to step S13126. If it is determined to be "small hit", that is, "miss" (NO in step S13125), first special symbol loss in step S13130. The time variation pattern table number setting process is performed, and the special symbol variation pattern table number setting process ends. The first special symbol loss variation pattern table number setting process will be described later.

In step S13126, the main CPU 101 determines whether both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF, and when both the probability variation flag and time saving flag are OFF (YES in step S13126), the process proceeds to step S13127. If either one of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag is ON (NO in step S13126), the process proceeds to step S13129.

In step S13127, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit time selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination processing performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112) is “z17”, and the hit time selection symbol command. Is "z17" (YES in step S13127), the variation pattern table number is set to "7" (step S13128), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is ended. If the winning selection symbol command is other than “z17” (NO in step S13127), the process proceeds to step S13129.

In step S13129, the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to “8”, and ends the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

[2-4-7. Variation pattern table number setting process when the first special symbol is lost]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol loss variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table number setting process at the time of the first special symbol loss, during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern table number setting process described above, the result of the first special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit" Is a process that is called as a subroutine. The variation pattern table number set in the variation pattern table number setting process at the time of the first special symbol loss is shown in the variation pattern table number setting table (FIG. 107).

As shown in FIG. 115, in step S13131, the main CPU 101 determines whether the probability variation flag is ON. If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in step S13131), the process proceeds to step S13132, and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is OFF (NO in step S13131), the process proceeds to step S13135.

In step S13132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is ON, that is, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON (YES in step S13132), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation pattern table number to “11” (step S13133), and the first special symbol loss The time variation pattern table number setting process ends. If the time saving flag is not ON, that is, the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S13132), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation pattern table number to “12” (step S13134), and the first The special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting process ends.

In step S13135, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is ON, that is, when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S13135), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to “11” (step S13136), and the first special symbol loss The time variation pattern table number setting process ends.

If the time saving flag is not ON, that is, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF (NO in step S13135), the main CPU 101 determines whether the first special symbol is held, that is, the first starting information is It is determined whether or not it is stored in the holding area (step S13137).

When the first special symbol is reserved (YES in step S13137), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "1" (step S13138), and proceeds to step S13139. In this way, by setting the variation pattern table number to "1" when the first special symbol is held so that the shortened variation A can be determined, the holding of the first starting information is prevented from being accumulated as much as possible. It becomes possible. However, even if the first special symbol is held, the shortest variation time may be set to, for example, 6000 msec so that the shortened variation A is not determined.

In step S13140, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game mode is larger than "5", that is, whether it is "0". If the game mode is larger than "5", that is, it is not "0" (step S13140). YES), the game mode, the HG counter and the reach determination random number corresponding to the set value are set, and the variation pattern table number is set (step S13141). For example, if the game mode is "6", the HG counter is "50", and the reach determination random number is "10 (settings 1 and 2)", the fluctuation pattern table number is set to "4" (see FIG. 107). ). In this case, the variation pattern table numbers that are set are common regardless of whether the HG counter is 0 to 99. Even if the game mode is "6", the variation pattern table number is set to "4" when the time saving flag is ON. After performing the processing of step S13141, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S13142.

The main CPU 101 also determines in step S13139 whether or not the game mode is larger than "5". If the game mode is larger than "5" (YES in step S13139), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S13142 and sets the game mode to " 5" or less (NO in step S13139), the first special symbol loss variation pattern table number setting process ends.

In step S13142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the HG counter, and proceeds to step S13143. The HG counter is not subtracted when the time saving flag is ON, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and is subtracted only when the time saving flag is OFF.

In the second embodiment, the HG counter is decremented by determining whether the game mode is larger than "5", but the HG counter does not necessarily need to be discriminated by the game mode. For example, when the big hit or the small hit is hit, the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (whether it was the symbol controlled to the RG state or the HG state) and the setting of the time saving flag are determined, and the HG counter is subtracted. You can

In step S13143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the HG counter is 0, and if the HG counter is 0 (YES in step S13143), sets the game mode to "0" (step S13144), and 1 Special symbol time variation pattern table number setting process ends. If the HG counter is not 0 (NO in step S13143), the main CPU 101 ends the first special symbol lost time variation pattern table number setting process without changing the game mode.

When the game mode is determined to be "5" or less, that is, "0" in step S13140 (NO in step S13140), the main CPU 101 assigns the variation pattern table number based on the reach determination random number according to the set value. It sets to "2" or "3" (step S13145), and ends the first special symbol lost variation pattern table number setting process. For example, if the reach determination random number is “8 (settings 1 and 2)”, the variation pattern table number is set to “2”, and if the reach determination random number is “10 (settings 1 and 2)”, the variation pattern is set. The table number is set to "3" (see FIG. 107).

[2-4-8. Second special symbol fluctuation pattern table number setting process]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. The second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S13151, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is “big hit”. If it is determined to be a "big hit" (YES in step S13151), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "15" (step S13152), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

When it is determined that the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is not the “big hit” (NO in step S13151), the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the hit determination is “small hit”. Is determined (step S13153). If it is determined to be "small hit" (YES in step S13153), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "14" (step S13154), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

When it is determined that the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is neither “big hit” nor “small hit”, that is, “miss” (NO in step S13153), the main CPU 101 determines that The variation pattern table number is set to "13" (step S13155), and the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process ends. When the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process ends, the process moves to step S1316, and then the special symbol variation pattern setting process ends.

[2-4-9. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S1041). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S1041), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S1041), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S1042.

In step S1042, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (fluctuation display start waiting time) set by the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S1042), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S1042), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S1043.

In step S1043, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination (see step S1219 in FIG. 112) is “big hit”. When it is determined that the hit determination result is “big hit” (YES in step S1043), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S1044. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S1043), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S1050.

In step S1044, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1045.

In step S1045, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the hour/hour counter, the HG counter, the hour/hour flag, and the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1046.

In step S1046, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a waiting time timer (step S1047).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol type in the main RAM 103 (step S1048). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), the number of rounds corresponding to the winning selection symbol command (round number upper limit value), ON/OFF of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, the number of times saving ( The time saving counter), the HG counter, and the game mode are set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S1049). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S1050, the main CPU 101 executes time reduction counter subtraction processing. The time reduction counter subtraction process is as described above with reference to FIG.

In step S1051, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination (see step S1219 in FIG. 112) is “small hit”. When it is determined that the result of the hit determination is "small hit" (YES in step S1051), the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S1052). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“03”) indicating a small hit start interval management process (step S105) described later (step S1053), and sets a time corresponding to the small hit start interval to a waiting time timer. Is set (step S1054).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the type of special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S1055), and ends the special symbol display time management process. By performing the process of step S1055, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

When it is determined in step S1051 that the result of the hit determination is not "small hit", that is, "miss" (NO in step S1051), the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the special symbol game end process ( A process of setting "11") is performed (step S1056). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[2-4-10. Small hit end interval processing]
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the small hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The small hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing (step S1611). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process (NO in step S1611), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process (YES in step S1611), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S1612.

In step S1612, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S1612), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S1612), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S1613.

In step S1613, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S1613), and proceeds to step S1614.

In step S1614, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the small hit flag, that is, a process of setting the small hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 to OFF, and proceeds to step S1615.

In step S1615, the main CPU 101 sets the game mode according to the hit time selection symbol command acquired by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process (see step S1120 in FIG. 112). To do. The game mode corresponding to the winning selection symbol command is as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets the game mode to "10" as shown in the small hit symbol determination table. Although not shown in FIG. 118, when the probability variation flag is ON, the main CPU 101 does not set the game mode (without executing the process of step S1615) but after performing the process of step S1614. , The small hit interval processing ends (the HG counter is not set).

Next, in step S1616, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game mode set in step S1615 is one of "8" to "16". Then, when the game mode set in step S1615 is one of "8" to "16" (YES in step S1616), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1617. When the game mode set in step S1615 is not any of "8" to "16" (NO in step S1616), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1618.

In step S1617, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112), and determines the HG counter corresponding to the hit selection symbol command. Is set (step S1615), and the small hit end interval process is ended. The HG counter corresponding to the hit selection symbol command set in step S1615 is as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to "100" as shown in the small hit symbol determination table.

In step S1618, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game mode set in step S1615 is “17”. Then, when the game mode set in step S1615 is "17" (YES in step S1618), the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to "100000" as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). Is set (step S1619), and thereafter the small hit end interval process is ended. The game mode to be set is "17". On the other hand, when the game mode set in step S1615 is not "17" (NO in step S1618), that is, when the game mode set in step S1615 is neither "8" to "17" (the game mode is When "0" (when the winning selection symbol command is "z18"), the main CPU 101 moves to step S1620.

In step S1620, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to “0” and ends the small hit end interval process.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the HG counter is set according to the set game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the small hit pattern when the small hit is won. The HG counter may be set.

Further, the HG counter "100000" is set as the number of games that cannot be executed within the business hours of the hall (the number of times the special symbol changes). Also, when the winning selection symbol command is "z17", the game mode to be set is "17", so in the gaming state after the small hitting gaming state ends, the variation pattern as shown in FIG. 107. The BHG state in which the table number is set to 2 or 6 is set. Therefore, when the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z17", the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "big hit" and the HG counter is newly set or The main CPU 101 continuously controls the BHG state until the result of the special lottery is “small hit” and the HG counter is newly set.

In addition, not only in the BHG state but also in all HG states, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", the game mode and the HG counter are newly set. When the HG counter is newly set, the current HG state ends, and after the small hitting game state ends, the newly set HG state is controlled, but a non-HG small hit (hit selection command "z18 When the small hit) is won, the HG counter is set to 0, and after the small hit game state ends, the LG state is controlled.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 0 when the non-HG small hit (the hit selection symbol command is "z18") is won. However, the HG counter may not be set. In this case, when the HG counter is greater than 0 and the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, and the small hit symbol is a non-HG small hit, the main CPU 101 simply wins the small hit prize hole. Only by performing the process of opening and closing 560, the variation pattern table used until then is maintained as it is without changing the variation pattern table used when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of “z17”, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the small hit is a non-HG small hit. The BHG state is continuously controlled. In the BHG state, when the winning selection symbol command wins any of "z8" to "z16", the main CPU 101 resets the HG counter according to the type of the small hit symbol (hit hour selection symbol command). Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, it is preferable for the player to be a non-HG small hit. Therefore, when the winning selection symbol command is controlled to the BHG state based on the winning of the small hit of "z17", if the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", the sub CPU 201, the small hit Performing an effect that does not specify the type of symbol can enhance the interest. Here, the above-mentioned "state where the HG counter is greater than 0" means not only the HG state but also the LG state before the winning selection symbol command moves to the HG state like "z15". Is meant to include the LG state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is “z18”, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened and closed. In addition, a process of setting the HG counter to 0 may be performed, or a process of simply opening and closing the small hit winning a prize hole 560 may be performed without setting the HG counter. However, in the first place, it is not essential to provide a small hit when the winning selection symbol command is "z18".

The HG counter set in step S1619 is not limited to "100000" as long as it is the number of games that cannot be executed within the business hours of the hall.

By the way, the HG counter is set in the small hit end interval process when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", and as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106), 2 When the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the HG counter is not set. Therefore, even if the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" when the HG counter is greater than 0, the HG counter is not set based on this "small hit", and the current HG counter is not set. Will continue. That is, the main CPU 101 controls so that the current HG state continues.

[2-4-11. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the big hit end interval processing (step S1811). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“10”) indicating the big hit ending interval process (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“10”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S1812.

In step S1812, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S1812), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S1813.

In step S1813, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S1814). The number-of-rounds distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. When the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S1815).

Next, in step S1816, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the big hit flag, that is, processing for setting the big hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S1817.

In step S1817, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112), and the game mode according to the hit time selection symbol command acquired. Is set (step S1817). The game mode corresponding to the winning selection symbol command is as shown in the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105). For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 sets the game mode to "3" as shown in the big hit symbol determination table.

Next, in step S1818, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game mode set in step S1817 is one of "1" to "4". Then, when the game mode set in step S1817 is any of "1" to "4" (YES in step S1818), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1819. When the game mode set in step S1817 is not one of "1" to "4" (NO in step S1818), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1820.

In step S1819, the main CPU 101 sets "1" as the probability variation flag (that is, turns on the probability variation flag), and proceeds to step S1821.

On the other hand, in step S1820, the main CPU 101 sets “0” as the probability variation flag (that is, turns the probability variation flag OFF), and proceeds to step S1821.

In step S1821, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game mode set in step S1817 is one of "2" to "7". Then, when the game mode set in step S1817 is any of "2" to "7" (YES in step S1821), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1822. When the game mode set in step S1817 is not any of "2" to "7" (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1823.

In step S1822, the main CPU 101 sets “1” as the time saving flag (that is, turns the time saving flag ON), and proceeds to step S1824.

In step S1824, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a prescribed number of time reductions in the time reduction counter. In the second embodiment, referring to the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", "z1" or "z19", the time saving counter is set to 0 times, When the winning selection symbol command is "z2", "z5" to "z7" or "z20", the time saving counter is set to 4 times, and when the winning selection symbol command is "z3" or "z21" Sets the time saving counter 24 times, and when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4" or "z22", sets the time saving counter 54 times. After ending the processing of step S1824, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1825.

On the other hand, in step S1823, the main CPU 101 sets "0" as the time saving flag (that is, turns off the time saving flag), and proceeds to step S1825.

In step S1825, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the HG counter. In the second embodiment, referring to the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), when the winning selection symbol command is “z0” to “z4”, “z19” to “z22”, the HG counter is 100000 times. Is set, when the winning selection symbol command is "z6", "z7", "z24" or "z25", the HG counter is set to 100 times, and the winning selection symbol command is "z5" or "z23". ", the HG counter is set to 0. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

The HG counter "100000" is set as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of special symbols) that cannot be executed within the business hours of the hall. Therefore, when the winning selection symbol command is any of "z0" to "z4", "z19" to "z22", the main CPU 101 until the next big hit game state is controlled ("big hit" The RG state is controlled unless the HG counter is set again by winning. That is, if the "big hit" is not won, the RG state will continue. The HG counter set in step S1825 is not limited to "100000" as long as it is the number of games that cannot be executed within the business hours of the hall.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the probability change flag, the time saving flag and the HG counter are set according to the set game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a big hit is won. The probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the HG counter may be set according to the big hit symbol.

In addition, when the big hit design of the 1st special design or/and the 2nd special design (the design command when hitting), the big hit design which has the ceiling function (the big hit design A-C which mentions) is included, main CPU101, The processing is performed as follows.

That is, when the big hit of the big hit symbol A is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (=510 times in the ceiling game +100 times in the HG state), and sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to OFF and the time saving counter. Set to 0. Since the main CPU 101 controls to the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the variation pattern table number is determined to be "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls to the LG state when the HG counter is “100 to 609”, the variation pattern table number is set to “3” except when the reach effect is determined. That is, when the ceiling game is exhausted (when the HG counter reaches 99), the main CPU 101 changes the variation pattern table number of the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol from "3" to "4". "To "6", and the HG state (100 times) is controlled.

When the big hit of the big hit symbol B is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (= ceiling game 510 times + HG state 100 times), the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, and the time saving counter 4 times. set. When the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 does not subtract the HG counter even if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and only when the time saving flag is OFF, the HG counter is subtracted. Therefore, when the big hit symbol B is won, only the time saving counter is subtracted from the time saving counter and the HG counter until the game is executed four times after the big hit gaming state ends. Then, when the time saving counter becomes 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts the HG counter each time the game is executed. Since the main CPU 101 controls to the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the variation pattern table number is determined to be "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls to the LG state when the HG counter is “100 to 609”, the variation pattern table number is set to “3” except when the reach effect is determined. That is, the main CPU 101, when the time saving counter is exhausted, and then the ceiling game is exhausted (HG counter becomes 99), the fluctuation pattern table number of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Is changed from "3" to any of "4" to "6", and the HG state (100 times) is controlled.

Further, when the big hit of the big hit symbol C is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (= ceiling game 510 times + HG state 100 times), and the probability variation flag OFF, the time saving flag ON, and the time saving counter 100 times. set. When the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 does not subtract the HG counter even if the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and only when the time saving flag is OFF, the HG counter is subtracted. Therefore, when the big hit symbol C is won, only the time saving counter is subtracted from the time saving counter and the HG counter until the game is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state ends. Then, when the time saving counter becomes 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts the HG counter each time the game is executed. Since the main CPU 101 controls to the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the variation pattern table number is determined to be "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls to the LG state when the HG counter is “100 to 609”, the variation pattern table number is set to “3” except when the reach effect is determined. That is, the main CPU 101, when the time saving counter is exhausted, and then the ceiling game is exhausted (HG counter becomes 99), the fluctuation pattern table number of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Is changed from "3" to any of "4" to "6", and the HG state (100 times) is controlled.

In addition, when a plurality of HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) are prepared as the HG state like the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, after the ceiling game is digested, one of them is identified. The HG state may be controlled, or the HG state controlled according to the big hit symbol may be different.

In addition, a big hit design in which the HG counter is set (that is, the HG state is controlled after the ceiling game has been digested) and a big hit design in which the HG counter is not set are prepared, and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. At this time, it is preferable that it is difficult to visually recognize the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 as to whether it is a big hit design in which the HG counter is set or a big hit design in which the HG counter is not set. Furthermore, when a plurality of HG states with different profit degrees for the player are prepared, it may be controlled to an HG state with a higher profit degree for the player (for example, BHG state). You may make it the production which a player expects.

By the way, each value of the time saving counter and the HG counter is stored in the main RAM 103. That is, the main RAM 103 has a buffer area for storing the setting of the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, the time saving counter value, the HG counter value, and the like, in addition to the holding area and the fluctuation start area. Specifically, the clear area at the time of clearing the backup of the main RAM 103 in the second embodiment is F0000 to F1BD. The probability change flag, the time saving flag, the time saving counter, the game mode and the HG counter are also stored in this area and will be erased when the backup is cleared. Specifically, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving counter value are stored in F1A0 to F1AF in the above area, and the game mode and the HG counter value are stored in F1B0 to F1BD. As described above, when the backup clear process is performed, everything is erased, but in the second embodiment, the clear area is set to F0000 to F1AF in the backup clear process involving the setting change process. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change is performed, the game mode and the HG counter value are retained without being erased.

The above backup clear processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

In the setting change process shown in FIG. 120, the point different from the setting change process shown in FIG. 23 is the process when the main CPU 101 determines that the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410). In the setting change process shown in FIG. 23, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), a backup clear process (step S2420) is performed. On the other hand, in the setting change process shown in FIG. 120, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 sets the setting change flag to ON (step S2415), and then step The backup clear process of S2420A is performed.

Next, the backup clear process shown in FIG. 121 will be described below. The main CPU 101 first determines in step S2421A whether the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421A), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421A), the step S2422A. Move on to.

In step S2422A, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change flag is ON. When the setting change flag is ON (YES in step S2422A), the main CPU 101 executes a process of clearing the area F0000 to F1AF of the main RAM 103 (step S2423A), and proceeds to step S2424A.

In step S2424A, the main CPU 101 performs clear notification setting for F0000 to F1AF, then sets the setting change flag to OFF (step S2425A), and proceeds to step S2428A.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in step S2422A), the main CPU 101 executes processing for clearing the areas F0000 to F1BD of the main RAM 103 (step S2426A), and proceeds to step S2427A.

In step S2427A, the main CPU 101 performs clear notification setting of F0000 to F1BD, and then proceeds to step S2428A.

In step S2428A, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear processing.

Therefore, for example, when the game machine manager of the hall performs the setting change process before the opening of the hall, the HG counter value is not cleared unless the backup clear process without further setting change process is performed, and the day before The HG counter will be taken over at the end of hall business. Therefore, for example, if the game machine manager in the hall wants to clear both the setting change and the HG counter value, he/she may perform the backup clear process without the setting change process after performing the setting change process, and the probability change flag. When it is desired to turn off the time saving flag but leave the HG counter, the setting change process may be performed without performing the backup clear process without the setting change process. In this way, it is possible to operate the hall in a manner desired by the game machine manager of the hall.

In the second embodiment, since the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set and the HG counter is decremented according to the set game mode, the game mode is set to the same main RAM 103 as the HG counter value. It is stored in the area (F1B0 to F1BD). However, it goes without saying that it is not necessary to store the game mode in the same area (F1B0 to F1BD) of the main RAM 103 as the HG counter value when the game mode is not used for setting the probability variation flag and the time saving flag or subtracting the HG counter. Yes.

In addition, the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol big hit design (the selection command at the time of hitting) the big hit design B or big hit design C (that is, the big hit design where the ceiling game is started after the time saving game is digested) ), the main CPU 101 clears the time saving flag and the time saving counter value when the setting change process is performed before the time saving game is exhausted (before the value of the time saving counter becomes 0). And, regardless of the number of hours saved until the hour count value is cleared, the LG state is started from the ceiling game (remaining number) 510 times. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process, the main CPU 101 also clears the HG counter value, so that the game is started in a state where the ceiling game number is not set. When the setting change process is performed in the LG state, the main CPU 101 takes over the HG counter value before the setting change process is performed.

In addition, when the jackpot design having the ceiling function (the jackpot design described above) is included, the result of the special lottery is one of the jackpot designs A to C (the jackpot pattern in which the number of ceiling games is set). If there is, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state to the LG state after the ceiling game number is exhausted and the HG state (100 times) ends, but in this case, the result of the special lottery is again the big hit symbol A to Unless it becomes either C, the ceiling game number is not set.

If the result of the special lottery during the ceiling game is a big hit or a small hit other than the non-specific small hit (first small hit, second small hit, super small hit), the HG counter value is updated. Since it is set to, the ceiling counter value up to that point is not inherited.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine in which the special lottery result includes the big hit symbol having the ceiling function, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the normal gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

The various information stored in the areas (F1B0 to F1BD) and the areas (F1B0 to F1BD) of the main RAM 103 may be cleared by erasing the various information stored in the above areas. Alternatively, any of the modes in which various information stored in each of the above areas is eventually erased by overwriting new information may be adopted.

By the way, in the present embodiment, by changing the expected value of the length of the period in which the second starting mouth prize is valid between the LG state and the HG state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hitting game state, that is, Although the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is changed, it is not limited to this. For example, the table used to determine the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the special symbol is a normal table in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is relatively small, and the table per unit time. A specific table is prepared in which the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol is relatively large, and the main CPU 101 determines the variable display pattern of the special symbol using the normal table in the LG state, and the specific table in the HG state. You may make it determine the variable display pattern of a special symbol using. In this case, the HG state is more advantageous to the player than the LG state in that the average of the variable display time of the special symbols becomes shorter. Then, the main CPU 101 executes control for shifting to the LG state when the time saving game is digested in the low certainty time gaming state, and shifts to the HG state when the ceiling game (for example, 510 times) is digested in the LG state. The control may be executed. Even in such a case, if the setting change process is performed before the time saving game is exhausted (before the value of the time saving counter becomes 0), the main CPU 101 clears the time saving flag and the time saving counter value. Therefore, the LG state is started from the ceiling game (remaining number of times) 510 times, regardless of the number of times saved and reduced until the time saving flag and the time saving counter value are cleared. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process, the game is started in a state where the ceiling game number is not set.

[2-4-12. Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process of FIG. 122 is different from the normal symbol control process of FIG. 40. In FIG. 40, starting information of a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal starting information”) can be reserved, whereas in FIG. It is a point that the processing is performed on the assumption that the starting information is not reserved (particularly, the normal symbol variation start area check processing in step S1912).

Normally, the symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical value ("00" to "04") described in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 indicates a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 122, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S1911). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S1912 to S1916 described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of steps S1912 to S1916. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of step S1912 to step S1916. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 normally performs a symbol variation start area check process (step S1912). In FIG. 40, the normal symbol storage check process is called, but in FIG. 40, the normal starting information is held, whereas in FIG. 122 the normal starting information is not held, so it is called the normal symbol variation start area check process. In this normal symbol fluctuation start area check process, the main CPU 101, if the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol fluctuation start area check process ("00"), the normal start information in the fluctuation start area of the normal symbol It is checked whether or not is stored, and when normal start information is stored in the variation start area of the normal symbol, processing such as normal hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193) described later to the ordinary symbol control state flag, and the variation time determined in this process. Set the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol elapses, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 normally performs a symbol variation time monitoring process (step S1913). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process ("01"), when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set by the main CPU 101 has elapsed, the normal symbol A value (“02”) indicating a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S1914) described later is set in the control state flag, and a wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S1913, after the set waiting time after confirmation elapses, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described below is set to be executed.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 reduces the variation time of the normal symbol so that it is difficult to grasp the change in the variation time of the normal symbol by appearance when the time reduction flag is OFF and when it is ON. When the flag is OFF, it is set to 510 msec, for example, and when the time saving flag is ON, it is set to 500 msec, for example. Since an interval is set before and after the variable display of the normal symbol, the total time of the variable time of the normal symbol and the interval time is, for example, 1000 msec when the time saving flag is OFF, and when the time saving flag is ON. Is, for example, 990 msec. However, it goes without saying that the variation time and the interval time of the normal symbol are not limited to the above.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S1914). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S1913 has elapsed, normal It is determined whether or not the result of the symbol determination is "normal hit". Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is "normal hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a normal electric auditors product releasing process (step S1915) described later. Set the value ("03"). That is, this processing is set to execute the later-described normal electric auditors product opening processing. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is not “normal hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S1916) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the normal hit probability to OFF so that it is difficult to visually recognize the change in the normal hit probability between when the time-shortening flag is OFF and when it is ON. For example, when it is set to 32767/32768, when it is ON, it is set to 32768/32768, for example. However, it goes without saying that the ordinary hit probability is not limited to the above.

Also in the above normal electric accessory opening setting process, the main CPU 101 makes it difficult to visually recognize the change in the opening mode of the normal electric auditors when the time saving flag is OFF and when it is ON. The opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is set to, for example, 3000 msec when the time saving flag is OFF, and is set to, for example, 3100 msec when the time saving flag is ON. However, it goes without saying that the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the above.

Next, when it is determined in step S1914 that the result of the normal symbol determination is “normal hit”, the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S1915). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the normal electric auditors product opening process, the main CPU 101 says that a predetermined number of prizes have been won during the opening of the normal electric auditors product 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electricity supplier opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4622 (see, for example, FIG. 97) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S1916) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol game end processing (step S1915). In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbols is not reserved. That is, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 when the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed and the interval for the variation display of the normal symbol is not reached, the normal symbol according to the starting information of the extracted normal symbol. The variation display of the lottery and the ordinary symbol is performed, and even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 when the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed, the variation display of the ordinary symbol based on the starting information of the extracted ordinary symbol is It is not held and the starting information of the extracted normal symbol is discarded. When the process of step S1915 ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the time saving flag is ON, compared to when the time saving flag is OFF, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the probability of normal winning is increased, and the normal electric auditors product 460 is opened. We are extending the time. However, as described above, depending on whether the time saving flag is ON or OFF, any one of the reduction of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the increase of the probability of ordinary winning, and the extension of the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is performed. Only one or two may be changed, without changing the control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 (shortening the variation time of the ordinary symbol, increasing the probability of ordinary hitting, extending the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460). The changing time of the special symbol may be changed.

[2-4-13. Relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory and the variation time of the first special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol (when the result of the first special lottery is lost) will be described. FIG. 123 is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol. The variation time (1000 msec) of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 123 is an approximate time including the interval time, and the opening time (3000 msec) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is also an approximate time. Further, the period in which the main CPU 101 determines that the second starting opening winning is valid is shown by hatching.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged immediately above the first starting opening 420, and all the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting opening 420. It is configured. Therefore, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is always performed if the variation start condition is satisfied. Further, since the normal hit probability is about 100% as described above, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the normal electric auditors product 460 is opened with a probability of about 100%.

FIG. 123(a) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol in the LG state. In the LG state, when the result of the first special lottery is lost, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table of the variation pattern table number 2 or 3 (see FIG. 108).

Therefore, in the LG state, as shown in FIG. 123(a), even if the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be either the regular variation A or the regular variation B, the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is opened. The first special symbol will be variably displayed during the entire period of the period. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 during the period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open, it cannot be expected that the second starting opening winning is determined to be effective. .. As shown in the table showing the probabilities of the big hit and the small hit (see FIG. 102), the probability of winning the “small hit” in the first special lottery is relatively small, and the result of the first special lottery is When it is "small hit", the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in a manner that the game ball is harder to win than when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". Therefore, in the LG state, the payout of prize balls due to the control in the small hitting game state cannot be expected to the left.

FIG. 123(b) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol in the HG state. In the HG state, if the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table number 2 or any one of the variation pattern tables 4 to 6 (see FIG. 108).

Therefore, in the HG state, as shown in FIG. 123(b), when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the normal fluctuation A or the normal fluctuation B, the normal electric auditors product 460 is opened. The first special symbol will be variably displayed during the entire period. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the normal variation C, there occurs a period in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed in the period in which the normal electric auditors product 460 is open. Therefore, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 440 during the period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, it is determined that the second starting opening winning is effective. , The second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed based on the extracted second starting information. Here, as shown in the table showing the probability of big hits and small hits (see FIG. 102), if the second special lottery is performed, if the “big hit” is not won, the “small hit” is always won. Therefore, in the HG state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hitting game state is increased as compared with the LG state.

In the BHG state, the MHG state, and the SHG state, the probability of being controlled to the small hitting game state is changed by making the probability determined by the normal fluctuation C different, and the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is changed. I have different expectations. Specifically, the variation pattern table numbers 4 and 5 and 6 have different probabilities of being determined as the normal variation C, and in the BHG state, the first special symbol based on the variation pattern table of the variation pattern table number 2 or 6. The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table of the variation pattern table number 2 or 5 in the MHG state, and the variation pattern table of the variation pattern table number 2 or 4 is displayed in the SHG state. Based on this, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

FIG. 123(c) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol in the RG state. In the RG state, if the result of the first special lottery is lost, the variable display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern table of the variation pattern table number 12 (see FIG. 108), so that the first special symbol The fluctuation pattern is always set to the shortened fluctuation A.

Therefore, in the RG state, as shown in FIG. 123(c), when the result of the first special lottery is lost, the period in which the normal electric auditors product 460 is open and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol are executed. And do not overlap. Therefore, when the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 when the normal electric auditors product 460 is opened, it is determined that this second starting port winning is always valid, and the second starting information is extracted based on the extracted second starting information. The special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol will be displayed. In addition, when the second special lottery is performed, if the "big hit" is not won, the "small hit" is always won. Therefore, in the RG state, the frequency of controlling the small hit game state is higher than in the HG state (BHG state). The expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is more than 1.

Thus, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, by changing the expected value of the length of the period that is determined by the main CPU 101 that the second starting winning is effective, control to the small hit game state It is possible to easily change the expected frequency, that is, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time.

Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the jackpot gaming state is a right-handed game, but the left-handed game progresses not only in the LG state but also in the HG state and the RG state. It is possible to realize a game in a plurality of gaming states in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is different, without changing. Especially in the conventional pachinko gaming machines, for example, in the big hit game state, there are many cases where the game progresses by hitting the right and left in the normal playing state, so there is a strong awareness that left-handing is a disadvantageous gaming state for the player, When left-handed, games tended to be monotonous. In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, the game progresses by left-handing in the RG state in which there may be more balls during the period than in the big-hit gaming state, so the game proceeds left-handed, It becomes possible to realize a new game play that breaks the concept.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to shift from the LG state to the HG state without going through the big hit gaming state. In conventional pachinko game machines, apart from the big hit game state, there are also those that are controlled to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, but since it is controlled when the big hit is won, it is a big hit. The normal game state tended to be monotonous until winning. Therefore, by shifting from the LG state to the HG state without passing through the big hit game state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game in the normal game state which tends to be monotonous until the big hit is won.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the number of prize balls paid out when winning the second starting opening 440 is one, it is expected that the second starting opening winning is determined to be effective. In the LG state where it is not possible to hold, the ordinary electric auditors product 460 has a function of securing a base such that one prize ball is paid out for one winning in the second starting opening 440. On the other hand, in the game state (HG state, high-precision short time gaming state, low-precision short time gaming state, RG state) in which the second start opening prize may be determined to be valid, the second start opening 440 is won. In addition to the number of prize balls (1) that is sometimes paid out, 15 prize balls are paid out for each winning in the small hit prize hole 560, so the base-up function is an ordinary electric role. The object 460 can be held. In this way, it is possible to realize an unprecedented new game play such that the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 can be changed according to the game state.

By the way, in a general conventional pachinko gaming machine, a large number of starting information stored in the holding area is a relief material for the player because the special lottery and the variable display of the special symbol are continuously performed. .. However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the storage (holding) of the first starting information in the holding area is promoted, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously performed, the variation of the first special symbol Even if the pattern is the normal variation C shown in FIG. 123(b), there is a possibility that the period during which the second starting opening winning a prize is determined to be effective is shortened and the interest is decreased.

In this respect, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 97, the delivery member 820 (the first rotating member 822 and the second rotating member 828 (both refer to FIG. 97)) makes one After a certain time has passed since the game ball entered the first starting port 420, another game ball was configured to enter the first starting port 420. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first starting information from being held in the holding area and to prevent the period during which the second starting winning is determined to be valid from being shortened. In particular, the fixed time is preferably longer than the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times of the first special symbol that can be determined in the LG state. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the variation pattern table number 2 or 3 is determined in the LG state, the variation time of the shortest first special symbol is 6000 msec. Therefore, the sending member 820 is configured such that, after at least 6000 msec has elapsed since one game ball entered the first starting opening 420, another game ball entered the first starting opening 420. Is preferred.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the first special symbol is held, the fluctuation pattern table number is set to "1", so as shown in the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 108), The variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the shortened variation A with a relatively high probability of 80% (in the case of setting 1.2). As a result, even if the first starting information is temporarily reserved, it is possible to consume the temporarily stored first starting information in a short time, and it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is effective. It is possible to secure the period as much as possible.

In the RG state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is always determined to be a shortened variation A in which the period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the variation display execution period of the first special symbol do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the shortened variation A, the variation pattern (for example, the regular variation A) in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in the entire period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open. It may be decided. Even in this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is set to exceed 1 by adjusting the probability determined by the shortened variation A and the probability determined by the normal variation A. It is possible to

In the second embodiment, if the result of the second special lottery is not "big hit", the "small hit" is won with a probability close to 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this. The probability of “small hit” can be set appropriately within a range that does not deviate.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the LG state, regardless of whether the variation pattern of the normal variation A or the normal variation B is determined, the first special symbol in the entire period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open. Is variably displayed, but is not limited to this. For example, in the period in which the normal electric auditors product 460 is open, a fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation C) in which a fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not generated is provided, and the probability of being determined by such a fluctuation pattern May be lower than in the HG state.

When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", as shown in the fluctuation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107) and the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 108), the normal fluctuation A And reach performances A to D whose variation time is longer than any of the normal variation B. That is, the period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol overlap. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", even if the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 when the ordinary electric accessory 460 opens, the extracted second starting The information is discarded and the variable display of the second special lottery and the second special symbol is not performed.

[2-4-14. Relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric auditors and the variation time of the first special symbol (another example)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the variation time of the first special symbol (when the result of the first special lottery is lost) will be described. FIG. 124 is a time chart showing another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric auditors product and the variation time of the first special symbol in each gaming state. The variation time (1000 msec) of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 124 is an approximate time including the interval time, and the opening time (3000 msec) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is also an approximate time. Further, the period during which the variable display of the second special lottery and the second special symbol can be executed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is shown by hatching.

As shown in FIG. 124, in another example, when the result of the first special lottery is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol as follows. That is, in the RG state, the variation pattern in which the period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the variation display execution period of the first special symbol do not overlap is determined. Further, in the BHG state, the overlapping pattern of the period in which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be a relatively small variation pattern. Further, in the MHG state, in the range in which the period in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed occurs in the period in which the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is opened, the period in which the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is opened and the first special symbol An overlapping period with the variable display execution period of the symbol is determined to be a variation pattern larger than the MHG state. Further, in the SHG state, in a range in which a period in which the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed in the period in which the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is opened, the period in which the ordinary electric auditors product 460 is opened and the first special symbol The variation pattern is determined to have a relatively large overlapping period with the variable display execution period.

In this way, by changing the variation time of the first special symbol for each gaming state, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special lottery and the second special symbol, that is, the frequency of being controlled to the small hitting gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to change the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls to be fired per unit time for each game state.

The variation time of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 124 may be an average variation time. That is, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in each game state, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol may be determined as shown in FIG. 124, which shows the average variation time of the first special symbol. ..

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97), but the second starting opening winning is made, for example. Even if the setting suggestion effect is performed by lottery according to the set value when it is determined that it is not valid, or on the condition that the number of times when it is determined that the second starting mouth prize is not valid exceeds the specified number of times. good. The specified number of times may be determined uniformly or by lottery after the big hit ends. In that case, the longer the period during which the big hit does not occur, the easier it is for the setting suggestion effect to be produced, which may reduce the mental burden on the player.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, almost all of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting opening 420, and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is that the blade member is a normal hit. 4622 is opened to facilitate winning in the second starting opening 440, and almost all of the results of the second special lottery executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 440 are small hits, Under the condition that the second special lottery is executed only when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 when the 1 special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the result of the first special lottery is a small hit. By changing the variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by the fact that there is a period during which the second starting winning is effective (the first special symbol is not variably displayed during the period in which the blade member 4622 is open) By changing the expected value of the length of (period), it is possible to realize a plurality of states such as the LG state, the BHG state, the MHG state, and the SHG state in the normal game state, but with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time The method of realizing a plurality of states having different expected values of the number of prize balls is not limited to this. For example, it is provided with a first starting opening in which a game ball can win when left-handed and a second starting opening in which a game ball can win when right-handed, and in a first state, a first table (for example, a first table). The variation time of the special symbol is 10,000 msec, the variation time of the second special symbol is 600,000 msec) and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, and the small hit probability in the first special lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting opening. For example, if the winning probability in the second special lottery that is performed based on a winning of 1/300 or the second starting opening is, for example, 1/10, and the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, The second table (for example, the variation time of the first special symbol 10000 msec, the variation time of the second special symbol 1000 msec) may be used to shift to the second state in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Accordingly, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can be increased, and a plurality of states having different expected values can be realized. It will be possible. In addition, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time in a plurality of states that can be realized in this way is set to, for example, 50%, 70%, 90% and 1 or less (100% or less), respectively. For example, as the normal game state, it is possible to realize a plurality of states in which the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is different. In the above, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, it is possible to change from the first state to the second state by shortening the variation time of the second special symbol. Instead of the first special lottery result is a small hit, the first special symbol variation time is made longer and the second special symbol variation time is shortened, and the second state is changed. It may be changed to. Further, the timing of changing the variable time may be that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a jackpot pattern having a ceiling function, when the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot is the jackpot pattern A described above, the jackpot game as described above. After the state is finished, it is not controlled to the low-probability time short game state, and shifts to the HG state when 510 games are played in the LG state. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol B, after the big hit game state ends, the game in the low-probability time short game state is executed four times, and then the LG state is entered, and 510 games in the LG state. When performed, the HG state is entered. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol C, after the big hit game state is finished, the game in the low-probability time short game state is executed 100 times, and then the LG state is entered, and 510 games in the LG state. When performed, the HG state is entered. That is, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the number of times controlled to a low-probability time short game state is different depending on the types of big hit symbols A to C.

Here, for example, as can be seen by referring to the variation pattern table number setting table (FIG. 107) and the variation pattern table (FIG. 108), in the low certainty short time gaming state in which the probability variation flag OFF and the time saving flag are ON, the variation pattern of the special symbol Rarely (with a probability of 1% in setting 1 and 2) is determined to be the short variation A, but most are determined to be the normal variation A or the normal variation B (see the variation pattern table number “11”). .. Therefore, the probability that the second start opening prize is determined to be effective in the low certainty time short game state is almost as low as the probability that the second start opening prize is determined to be effective in the LG state. Further, the main CPU 101 does not control the HG state until after both the set time saving number and the ceiling game number (510 times) have been exhausted. That is, regardless of the number of time saved, the game is not controlled to the HG state unless the game is executed 510 times in the LG state. Therefore, when there are a plurality of types of big hit symbols having a ceiling function, such as big hit symbols A to B, which are different in the number of times saved, it is preferable for the player that the number of times saved is set to be small. Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of big hit symbols having a ceiling function with different time saving times set in this way, it is possible to provide a game with a lot of fun.

Further, when the big hit symbol B or the big hit symbol C is won, at least the four times of games controlled to the low-probability time short game state, the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 (display effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 or from the speaker 24. It is preferable to make it difficult to grasp which of the big hit symbol B and the big hit symbol C is won. In this case, when the big hit symbol A is won, it is preferable that the player has an expectation.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol hardly changes between the LG state and the low-probability time short game state. Therefore, even if the big hit symbol A is won, at least in the four games controlled to the low-probability short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 201 determines which of the big hit symbol A, the big hit symbol B, and the big hit symbol C is won. It is also possible to execute a production that is difficult to grasp.

Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the variable display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is almost unchanged between the LG state and the low-probability short-time gaming state, the sub CPU 201 makes it difficult to visually grasp the timing when the short-time gaming is finished. It may be executed. For example, in spite of winning the big hit symbol B (4 times of shortening time), it is a production that indicates that it is in a low-probability time shortening game state until 100 times of games are executed in the game state after the big hit game state ends. May be executed. In this case, if it is originally not controlled in the HG state unless the ceiling game number (for example, 510 times) is played in the LG state, 510 times is subtracted from 96 times (=100 times-4 times), which is 414 times. When the game is executed, the game goes into the HG state, which gives the player a sense of surprise.

In addition, after the big hit game state ends, whether the number of games that need to be executed before being controlled to the HG state is 510 times (in the case of big hit symbol A) or 514 times (in the case of big hit symbol B). , 610 times (in the case of the big hit symbol C), the sub CPU 201 may execute an effect that is difficult to grasp by appearance.

[2-5. Flow of games]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as an effect executed by the sub CPU 201 with the transition of the game state. 125. (i) to (nu) in FIG. 125 are (a) image examples in the LG state, (b) image examples showing that "big hit" is won, (c) image examples showing types of "big hit", ( (2) An image example showing that the RG state is started, (e) The chance stage where the jackpot gaming state ends and there is a possibility of shifting to the RG state or the HG state (in FIG. 125, “RG/HG acquisition chance”) (Shown), (e) image example in the RG ceiling standby zone (shown as “RUSH GAME ceiling standby ZONE” in FIG. 125) indicating that preparation for transition to the RG state, (g) RG state or LG An example image at a specific stage showing that there is a possibility of shifting to the state, (h) An image example showing that the HG state is started, and (li) Shows that the "small hit" was won in the first special lottery. An image example, (nu) is an image example in the HG ceiling standby zone (shown as “HG ceiling standby ZONE” in FIG. 125) indicating that preparation for transition to the HG state is in progress. The effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204.

The chance stage, the RG ceiling standby zone, the specific stage, and the HG ceiling standby zone are all stages or zones on the display controlled by the sub CPU 201.

First, while the game is being executed in the LG state shown in (a), if the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "big hit", as shown in (b), for example, three decorative patterns Is stopped and displayed as a doublet. This allows the player to know that he or she has won the jackpot.

After the image example showing that the "big hit" is won is displayed in (b), the image example showing the type of "big hit" is displayed as shown in (c). At this time, when the special lottery is executed, the jackpot type is internally determined, but on the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image as if the jackpot type was decided by the re-lottery is displayed. .. In the second embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is “MAX jackpot”, an effect image (image example of “a” in (c) of FIG. 125) that can be recognized as a “MAX jackpot” is displayed, When the result of the lottery is "RUSH jackpot", an effect image (image example of b of (c) in Fig. 125) that can be understood as "RUSH jackpot" is displayed, and the result of the special lottery is "MAX jackpot". When it is neither "." or "RUSH jackpot", an effect image (image example of c in (c) of FIG. 125) that can be understood as not being "MAX jackpot" or "RUSH jackpot" is displayed.

When the image example of (a) or (b) of (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed, after the jackpot gaming state is ended, the image example of (ii) is displayed and the RG state is started. The RG state continues until the "big hit" is won. When the "big hit" is won, the RG state is passed through the image example of (b) though not shown in FIG. 125, depending on the type of the "big hit" (c). Any one of (a) to (c) is displayed.

When the image example of (c) of (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed, after the big hit game state ends, the chance stage of (e) shifts to the low-probability time short gaming state or the high-probability time short gaming state. Controlled. The example of the image of (c) of (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed because the result of the special lottery is “4 hours reduction RUSH jackpot”, “24 hours reduction RUSH jackpot”, “54 hours reduction RUSH jackpot” , "4 time saving regular big hits", "4 time saving SHG big hits" or "4 time saving BHG big hits". That is, the chance stage is a stage in which after a predetermined number of short-time games have been digested, there is a possibility of shifting to any of the RG state, the HG state, and the LG state.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "4 hours saving RUSH jackpot", when the hour saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (2) is displayed and the RG state is started. It

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is “24 hours/hours RUSH jackpot” or “54 hours/hours RUSH jackpot” and the ceiling standby zone transition condition is satisfied, the hour-short game is executed four times in the chance stage of (e). Then, the image example of (to) is displayed, and the display shifts to the RG ceiling standby zone. The RG ceiling standby zone is a zone where it is decided that the RG state will shift to the RG state unless a big hit is won. And, if the result of the special lottery is "24 hours/hours RUSH jackpot", 20 games are played in the ceiling standby zone, and if the result of the special lottery is "54 hours/hours RUSH jackpot", it is in the ceiling waiting zone. After 50 games have been played, the image example of (2) is displayed and the state shifts to the RG state.

The above-mentioned ceiling standby zone shift condition is a condition for shifting to the RG ceiling standby zone, and whether or not the ceiling standby zone shift condition is satisfied is determined by the sub CPU 201. When the condition for moving to the ceiling standby zone is not satisfied, the process moves to the specific stage (g). The specific stage is a stage that indicates that the RG state may be entered or the LG state may be entered.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "4 hours/hours SHG jackpot", if the hours saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (h) is displayed and the SHG state is started. It

Also, when the result of the special lottery is "4 times BHG jackpot", when the time saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (h) is displayed and the BHG state is started. It

Note that (H) in FIG. 125 is an image example showing that the HG state is started, and is not an image that clearly indicates which of the SHG state, the MHG state, and the BHG state is started, but instead of this, The image may clearly indicate which of the SHG state, the MHG state and the BHG state is started.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "4 hours/hours normal jackpot" or "24 hours/hours RUSH jackpot" or "54 hours/hour RUSH jackpot" and the ceiling standby zone transition condition is not met , (G) move to a specific stage.

When the result of the special lottery is “24 hour reduction RUSH jackpot” and it moves to a specific stage of (G), after 20 games have been executed (4 times are executed in the (E) chance stage) , (2) image examples are displayed, and the RG state is started.

When the result of the special lottery is "54 hours reduction RUSH jackpot" and it moves to the specific stage of (G), after 50 games are played (4 times are executed in the chance stage of (E)) , (2) image examples are displayed, and the RG state is started.

When the result of the special lottery is "4 hours/hours normal big hit" and the game moves to the specific stage (g), after 20 or 50 games have been executed, the game moves to the LG state (a).

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" while the game is being executed in the LG state shown in (a), it indicates that the "small hit" is won, as shown in (ri). An example image is displayed. This allows the player to know that the small win has been won.

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is the first small hit or the super small hit among the small hits, after the image example of (ri) is displayed, the image example of (h) is displayed and HG The state is started. On the other hand, when the result of the first special lottery is the second small hit of the small hits, after the image example of (ri) is displayed, the image example of (nu) is displayed and the HG ceiling waiting zone is displayed. After the transition and the game in the HG ceiling standby zone has been executed a predetermined number of times, the image example of (H) is displayed and the HG state is started. The HG ceiling standby zone is a zone in which it is decided that the HG state will shift to a high hit unless a big hit or a small hit (super small hit, first small hit, second small hit) is won.

In addition, like the small hit of the selection symbol command at the time of "z11" to "z16", the LG state and a plurality of HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) are preliminarily set between two or more states. When a game progress pattern that shifts in a predetermined pattern is set, an image example in the (HG) HG ceiling standby zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the LG state that constitutes the game progress pattern, and in the HG state ( The image example of (h) is displayed and the game in the HG state is executed. In particular, when the winning selection symbol command is "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16", in the LG state before being controlled to the HG state, the sub CPU 201, the HG of (nu) The control for displaying the image example in the ceiling standby zone (image example showing that preparation for transition to the HG state is in progress) on the liquid crystal display device 16 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in the normal game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls to be fired per unit time is less than 1, the game progresses in a different game progression pattern depending on the small hit symbol. Can be executed, and it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game in the normal game state where the game tends to be monotonous.

Also, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (FIG. 106), in the case of a small hit when the winning selection symbol command is "z11", the game in the HG ceiling standby zone (LG state) is executed 10 times. After that, it shifts to the SHG state. Also, in the case of a small hit of the selection symbol command at the time of "z12", after the game in the HG ceiling standby zone (LG state) has been executed 30 times, it shifts to the MHG state. In other words, the number of game executions to stay in the HG ceiling standby zone differs depending on the small hit symbol. As a result, the player's emotions can be undulated even in the normal game state, and the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (FIG. 106), in the LG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is “z18”, the main CPU 101 determines that the HG The counter is set to "0" and the HG state is not controlled based on this small hit. However, in this case, the sub CPU 201 executes the same effect as the image example in the (HG) HG ceiling standby zone (including an effect similar to the extent that the appearance cannot be distinguished). That is, in the LG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is "z18", although it is not controlled in the HG state based on this small hit, the winning selection symbol command Functions as a small hit of Gase for the small hits of "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16", and it is possible to give the player an expectation for the transition to the HG state.

Further, in the HG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is "z18", the HG counter is set to 0 based on this small hit, so by the sub CPU 201. If the image example in the (HG) HG ceiling standby zone is displayed, is the winning selection symbol command any of the small hits of "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16"? Since it is not clearly indicated whether the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z18", it is possible to enhance the interest.

Even when the HG counter is not reset when the winning selection symbol command is "z18", in the LG state, the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is " z18”, the sub CPU 201 executes the same effect as the image example in the (HG) HG ceiling standby zone (including an effect that is similar to the extent that the appearance cannot be distinguished). Also in this case, it is possible to give the player an expectation for the transition to the HG state. Further, in the HG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the winning selection symbol command is "z18", the sub CPU 201 executes the image example in the (HG) HG ceiling standby zone. To do. In this case, since the HG counter is not reset based on the small hit of the selection symbol command at the time of "z18", the HG state is downgraded (reset to the HG state which is less advantageous to the player than the current HG state). Rather than wanting to be a small hit of the hit time selection symbol command "z18" in which the current HG state is maintained, it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as described above, the game progression pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z15" and the game progression pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z16" are in the middle. Up to 10 times (LG state 10 times→BHG state 10 times and then transition to LG state) are the same pattern. Therefore, the LG state after "LG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times" executed when the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z15", and the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z16" In the LG state after “10 LG states→10 BHG states” executed in the case of, the production mode executed by the sub CPU 201 is made similar to the above-mentioned LG by making it difficult to grasp the appearance. Since it is possible to give the player the expectation of shifting to the BHG state in the state, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the game in this LG state.

In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, instead of the image example of (i) displayed when the result of the first special lottery is the first small hit or the second small hit. It is even better to display a special effect image showing that a larger profit is given to the player.

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is a non-HG small hit, the sub-CPU 201 makes a small hit like when the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, a first small hit or a second small hit. Rather than performing an effect to let the player know that the player has won, it is difficult for the player to know that the player has won the small hit (for example, a small image is displayed in one corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the special lottery is performed). It is preferable to perform the effect in the same manner as in the case where the result is lost. In the second embodiment, the small hit in the first special lottery is provided for the purpose of shifting to the HG state, and is not mainly aimed at winning at the small hit winning hole 560 (hence, the first When the result of the special lottery is a small hit, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in a manner that it is more difficult to win a prize than when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit). Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a non-HG small hit, even if it is difficult for the player to know that the small hit is won, the disadvantage to the player is small, and rather, the small hit is made. It is considered that the merit of preventing the player from being discouraged by not knowing that the player will not shift to the HG even though he/she is won is considered to be greater.

In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the effect image showing that the small hit is won is displayed from the viewpoint of winning the small hit winning hole 560, though the state does not shift to the HG state. Is displayed.

[3. Other]
Each of the configurations described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment performs a game using a game medium, and all forms in which a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game It can be applied to gaming machines. That is, the main control circuit 100 itself is not limited to a form in which a game medium is shot or thrown in by a physical player's action to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that circulates the enclosed game balls to play the game, the game balls as the game medium are not discharged to the outside and are playable, so that the prize balls are paid out when the prize is won. Instead of this, prize ball data as a game medium is added. For example, when the number of prize balls is 15 and the prize-winning opening is a prize, if the game machine is an enclosed game machine, prize ball data of a value corresponding to 15 prize balls is given.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface with a medium handling device, and provides a necessary game medium for lending a game medium (that is, for a player to insert a game medium). Operation) or a combination relating to the payout of a game medium (a winning combination is achieved), a payout operation of a game medium (that is, a game medium is paid out to a player, and a necessary game medium is obtained. It is sufficient to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and the game is managed. In addition to the case where a person directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the capability of not transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the above lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by the image pickup means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine is described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has a game medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, an upper plate and a lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game sphere is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game sphere does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game sphere does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has got a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Furthermore, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that consumption, lending and payout of balls are performed. Further, "increasing or decreasing the number of game media" indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. In addition, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media accompanying lending and payout" is data relating to decrease in balls held due to firing of game balls and increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball through each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the payout number of the game ball due to that is added to the number of balls owned. Also, when a game ball is launched, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of balls to the game medium management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a ball (ball lending) or counting (returning) the ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit the data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the gaming media management device. In addition, in the first embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted possessed balls can be used for prize exchange or the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

[4. Note]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[4-1. First to eighth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, a structural element that influences the entrance rate to the entrance and the tendency toward payout. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the amusement of the game is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest. is there.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-1. First gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
With a display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols (for example, special symbols) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time,
A fluctuation pattern determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S78) that determines the fluctuation pattern performed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
A fluctuation pattern table storage unit (for example, a main ROM 102) that stores a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern,
The symbol display control means (the variable display of the symbol is performed over the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means (for example, the variation display of the special symbol), and the stop display is performed in a mode showing the result of the lottery ( For example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93,
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, the figure The variable time determination table table of the special symbol shown in 13) is stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the variation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of times of lottery per unit time, and eventually the result of the lottery. Expectations are increased, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a lottery number counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that counts the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
Another variation pattern table defined such that the probability of being determined as the short variation pattern becomes higher than the variation pattern table as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher (for example, in FIG. 15). The fluctuation time determination table table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored,
The fluctuation pattern determining means,
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the jackpot game state is finished), It is configured such that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the variation pattern can be determined by using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the more the number of times of lottery per unit time is remarkably increased, and the expectation of the player is increased when the number of times of execution of lottery is a specific number of times of execution, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a case where a big hit lottery of a special symbol of a predetermined number or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the big hit game state ends, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determining means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, a lottery for the variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when variable display of symbols (for example, variable display of special symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not. It may be done. In this case, even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbols, if it is determined to be unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination of the game information, It is structured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-2. Second game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) by a predetermined symbol is performed, and the result of the lottery can be shown by the stop mode of the symbol,
A stop mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
Stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) that stores a stop mode table (for example, the decorative pattern determination table of FIG. 14) that is used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determination means,
A symbol effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination unit,
When the symbols are displayed in a mode (for example, the first mode, the second mode, the specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (For example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certainty big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certainty big hit) Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control in FIG. 10),
Equipped with
The profit giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit that has a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability variation big hit),
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode is It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control means is the same regardless of the setting value, even though the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol will be stopped in the specific stop mode is increased as is higher.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. Since the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased as the set value set by the control means is increased, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the adequacy determining means while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. And even if the stop mode determining means determines that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed. Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, it is determined whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable for determining whether the game information is appropriate or not. If it is determined that the game is not progressed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-3. Third gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118, a big jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery),
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used in the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 16 or FIG. 17 is a jackpot),
At least display means for performing variable display of symbols (for example, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74),
A symbol display control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of the symbols and stops and displays the results of the lottery,
In the mode (for example, special figure 1-1 to special figure 1-8, special figure 2-1 to special figure 2-4) showing that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, big hit), the symbol is When displayed, a profit giving means for giving one of a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R probability big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R probability big hit) (eg, FIG. 10). With the main CPU101) which executes the big hit game control,
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables are stored in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R certainty variation big hits) having a relatively high degree of advantage among the plurality of profits differ according to set values,
The lottery means,
The lottery table is configured to be able to perform the lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed by using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage is different depending on the set value. It is possible to change the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to the player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability of the game state after the special game state is finished are given. And
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability game state differs depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled in the high-probability gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time saving game state) is further given,
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state varies depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is the result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-4. Fourth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting openings including a first starting opening and a second starting opening provided in the game area,
A special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118 that can perform a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (eg, acceptance) of a game ball into each of the plurality of starting openings. CPU 101),
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit),
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game,
Equipped with
The special lottery means,
When performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening, the probability that the particular result will be the specific lottery depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently, and
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, it is more frequent when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening. The specific game is configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, The specific game is executed with a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the starting opening. That is, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value, on the assumption that the specific game is executed with high frequency. It is possible to improve the interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed at a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening" When the game ball enters the starting opening, the winning judgment (including the probability 0) for the specific result is performed, but the probability that the specific result is obtained in the winning judgment is that the game ball enters the second starting opening. Not only a mode lower than the time, but also a mode in which when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the winning/deciding condition for a specific result is not included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 which makes an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 10) which performs an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (first starting port 420), the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the game ball to the second starting port (second starting port 440) Special symbol variable display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry,
A first game state (for example, both probability variation flag and time saving flag are set to OFF) which is long enough to affect the progress of the game by the time (for example, average time 1000 sec) of the variable display of the second special symbol. State), or the second gaming state (eg, average time 1 sec) is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol (eg, average time 10 sec) (eg, average time 10 sec) A gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF,
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second game state, since the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to realize that the execution frequency of the specific game is changed according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the adequacy determination means is inadequate before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start opening (for example, the second start opening). When it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the specific game execution means cannot execute the specific game without executing the specific game. And a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722)
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening), a special lottery (for example, a lottery based on the entrance of the game ball into the starting opening) is performed. Before the result of the second special lottery) is displayed (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that it is unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability of the game information, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-5. Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening,
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 which makes an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 10) which performs an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
Based on that the result of the special lottery performed based on the entrance (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result (for example, a small hit), within a specific area where the specific opening is provided. Specific region variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that game balls can easily enter (for example, be received)
Second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the fact that a game ball is received in the specific mouth provided in the specific area,
Equipped with
The specific region variable control means,
It is configured such that the predetermined movable piece can be actuated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area can differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value set. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and thus the opportunity to be given the privilege can be made different according to the set value set, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of a normal hit is different, a normal symbol is By changing the execution frequency of the special lottery according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is carried out in a different manner depending on the situation.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is carried out, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by changing the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is performed so that it can be changed according to the set value that has been set.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is carried out, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting opening, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 is performed. Main CPU 101) to execute,
It is characterized by including.

According to the (4) gaming machine, even if the game ball enters the starting opening, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result, it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability of game information. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece operates. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-6. Sixth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (eg, big hit), a special game state control means (eg, big hit game control in FIG. 10) that can be controlled to a special game state (eg, big hit game state) is executed. Main CPU 101),
A game state control means (eg, step S169) that can control the game state after the special game state is finished to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability game state) With the main CPU 101) that advances the game after setting the flag,
Counting means for counting the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
The game state control means,
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, the special game state is controllable,
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a prescribed number, the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the normal game state,
The specified number of times is
It is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to repeat the special game state and the advantageous game state up to a prescribed number of times, and the prescribed number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means, It is possible to improve the interest in playing games.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
The specified number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured such that the expected value for the specified number of times is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the prescribed number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this prescribed number of times is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it depends on the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storing unit is inappropriate, the counting unit counts even if the number of times counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. And a game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed without the number of times counted by the predetermined number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled to the normal gaming state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the prescribed number of times (that is, in the loop). ), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if it is in the loop, if it is determined that the game information is not suitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination, it is configured so that the game cannot proceed without the loop count reaching the specified number. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-7. Seventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118). ,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 10). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Production control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening production performed at the start of the special game state and an ending production performed at the end of the special game state,
Equipped with
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode in which the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the degree of advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control unit increases. It is characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value that is set, the more advantageous the lottery is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is set higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special game state, it is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening,
The adequacy determining means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine whether the game information is appropriate or not,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, the game progress disapproval is performed so that the game cannot be progressed even if the special game state is controlled. It is characterized by having means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S722).

According to the gaming machine of (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined even when the gaming machine is being controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so security is ensured. At the same time, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to solve the above first problem, an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-1-8. Eighth game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., character continuously operating left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., character continuously operating right gate 1110);
An entry permitting means (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances,
Different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different, or if there is a starting entrance below the entrance, a lottery will be conducted). Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 10) capable of giving the player whether or not it is executed)
Equipped with
The approach permitting means is
Of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means. To do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit to be given to the player will be different depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. In the first entrance and the second entrance, the accessibility of the game ball can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim as to which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while aiming to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be suitably changed.

In addition, "it is possible to give the player different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" is, for example, a game at the first entrance. Other than when the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting opening that triggers the lottery For example, the case where the prize is a general winning opening that is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 420, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118)
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game information related to the progress of the game including information on the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of holding storages stored in the holding storage means, a lottery result for the holding storages and variable displays, setting values) A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processes of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is informed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed without giving a profit,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the symbols, when the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit is not yet given, etc., it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate/unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, if it is determined that the player is not profitable in the suitability/unsuitability of the game information despite the possibility of being profitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, at least the first entrance and the second entrance, the entry validating means for validating the entry of the game ball (for example, a main device for activating a condition device). CPU101) is further provided,
The profit giving means is
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, 16R big hit game state) having a profit ratio higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game by aiming at the second entrance where there is a possibility that a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Becomes

According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[4-2. Ninth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game set value or the like, and security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while improving security.

In order to solve the second problem, a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) And game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 420),
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 420). ,
When the game information stored in the game information is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determining means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, it is determined that the variable display of the symbols is being performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the variable display of the symbols is displayed, so security is improved. It is possible to improve.

According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[4-3. Tenth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily impose a light design load. It is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while reducing the design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem, a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number within a predetermined width (for example, the main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program),
Random number extraction means for extracting random numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73),
Table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores a lottery table (for example, jackpot random number determination table) that defines total random numbers (for example, a range of jackpot determination random numbers) and specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data) ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extraction means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, jackpot determination value data), a special game state is controlled. Possible special game state control means,
Equipped with
The table storage means,
Stores a lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the setting value set by the setting change control means,
The random number generating means,
The number of total random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data), the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, Since the jackpot probability) is changed, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range of random numbers for jackpot determination fixed. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the appropriateness determining means (step) for determining whether the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not before the variable display of the symbol is started (step A main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82,
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (2), when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is unsuitable, the game cannot proceed, so that the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element in accordance with the setting while reducing the design load.

[4-4. Eleventh and twelfth gaming machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, while the player is suspicious of being able to arbitrarily set the payout tendency. , The interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting. Especially.

In order to solve the fourth problem, an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-4-1. Eleventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, a first starting opening 420, a second starting opening 440, a general winning opening 53) provided in the game area and including a starting opening,
A privilege giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game ball is received in any one of the plurality of winning openings;
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118),
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) for performing at least symbol variation effect based on the result of the lottery,
When a variation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific prize hole of the plurality of prize holes Setting suggesting means (for example, the sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the game ball is accepted
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening when the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since there is a possibility that the setting value information about the setting value set by the means will be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. Further, when the variation effect of the symbols is performed in the specific mode, the player may stop the firing of the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
A specific mode determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether or not to perform the variable effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect),
When it is determined by the specific aspect determination means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific aspect, a specific winning opening determination means that randomly determines any one of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening. (For example, the main CPU 101),
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings instead of a fixed winning opening, so that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that it is preferable to keep the specific winning openings randomly determined secret, without disclosing it. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storing unit is inappropriate, the setting change control unit sets the game ball even if the game ball is received in the specific winning opening. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value.
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the variation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in the specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested, the game information storage The suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined to be unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination of the game information, the setting value set by the setting change control means It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information of. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-4-2. 12th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 420, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118)
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 10). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition for accepting the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the overflow point has reached a predetermined point) Setting suggesting means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined condition for receiving the game ball into the starting opening is satisfied. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, the execution of the game is prompted so that the game ball is accepted in the starting opening. It should be noted that "to satisfy the predetermined condition regarding acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening" is, for example, held even though the game ball is accepted into the starting opening, because the holding upper limit has been reached. It is assumed that there is not, or when the game ball is accepted at the starting opening and it is not held because it was the upper limit for holding, and points are accumulated and the point reaches a predetermined point. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The game control means,
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.), a game progress disapproval means (for example, a game progress disapproval means for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means) , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening, in the determination of suitability or unsuitability regarding the game information made by the game ball being received in the starting opening. When it is determined that the game is not suitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the eleventh gaming machine and the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configurations, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest while changing the states of the gaming elements according to the settings.

[4-5. 13th gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entry to the entrance and the tendency of exiting the game is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set in a state corresponding to (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payout from becoming uniform for each game shop or each game table.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, payout management may not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform payout management.

In order to solve the fifth problem, a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
A payout means (for example, a payout device 340) for paying out a game medium based on a winning as a result of the game,
Based on that the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result (for example, a big hit), special game executing means (for example, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased). With the main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control of FIG.
A data totaling unit (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300) capable of totaling data relating to the game media paid out by the payout unit,
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying the data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
Equipped with
The data aggregation means,
All history totaling means for totaling the data based on the entire game history,
And a set value-based history totalizing means for totaling the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine, which is configured to be able to display data aggregated by the all history aggregate means and/or data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregate means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation unit and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation unit. It becomes possible to easily perform ball management.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily managing payout.

[4-6. Fourteenth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed has been disclosed (for example, see JP 2011-010833 A).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect is replaced. Is unnecessary and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and an ON operation of the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game property is set according to the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any of a plurality of setting values different from each other (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6),
Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on the game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means,
Based on the result of the lottery, special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, big hit game control in FIG. 10) in which a privilege according to the set value set by the setting change control means is given,
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it becomes possible for one gaming machine to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to have a wide range of ways of using the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means,
When set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state unless the lottery is won within a predetermined period. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending
When the second setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, in a high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control hand (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a game under a continuous game property (for example, a probability variation loop specification),
It is characterized by having at least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are common in that they are controlled to a high probability game state, but the first game control means. Depending on the game nature, the high-probability game state may end midway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and in the game nature by the second game control means, the high-probability game state is controlled to the next special game state. The difference is that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by allowing two game features that are similar in appearance but are substantially different from each other to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine to use the pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interests.

According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[4-7. 15th to 26th gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Seventh task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the player, they must be strictly managed by a person who has the authority, and the management is required to be convenient.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-1. Fifteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. It is characterized by having a limiting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, and the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-2. Sixteenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed, and the one setting value. And a transmission unit (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting the setting value information of
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And second setting means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information as history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The display control means,
First screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) showing history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66),
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which history information including at least the setting value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 68).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 66) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed.

The transmitting means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means,
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second screen showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed only when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. This prevents the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-3. Seventeenth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received) A second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information,
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating a performance control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. An information screen display limiting unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the hole menu display prohibiting process of step S316) that limits the display of the screen is included.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined condition is met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be viewed easily and security can be ensured. Becomes

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-4. 18th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific screen (for example, game machine manager) A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen showing history information (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on the display unit; Has,
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on at least when the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means has a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager). Only the information screen that can be viewed is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and the power is turned on at least when the setting operation means is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless it is displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above-mentioned normal screen may not be construed as being viewable by an unspecified person, for example, when only the player who has registered as a member can view it. It can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person, because anyone can view it (ie, if there is an intention to view it). On the other hand, the information screen is not a screen that can be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person who has the authority such as a gaming machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301) It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201 which terminates the hall menu task when it is determined, and a sub CPU 201 which executes the process of step S315 when it is determined as YES in step S314.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a nineteenth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-5. 19th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3066 or step S3160) that erases the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received,
The information erasing means,
It is configured such that the specific operation is accepted only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the history information is erased when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item “clear”) is accepted. It can be accepted only when the conditions are satisfied (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to erase the history of changing or confirming or browsing the set value for the purpose of fraud, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the erase cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized history from being intentionally deleted. Further, for the authorized person, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 68) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the setting value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The information erasing means,
When erasing the history information from the second storage unit, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit as history information can be erased.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted among the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by the authorized person, so that the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (for example, see FIG. 68). The information erasing unit may erase the associated history information (for example, for each No shown in FIG. 68) or may erase for each item among information of a plurality of items included in the history information ( For example, all of any one of the items of the date and time, the item of the operation type, and the item of the set value shown in FIG. 68 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-6. 20th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The setting operation information is
It is information capable of distinguishing the operation type, which is information indicating that the one setting value has been changed or information indicating that the one setting value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are shown as history information,
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is characterized by being configured into.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the set value information all correspond to a specific type of setting operation information, and an information screen of a list showing as history information, Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the specific information screen in which the setting value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) is improved. You can

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen in which the set value information is included in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-7. 21st game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen,
Although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314), when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. An information screen display limiting unit (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S312, step S313, or step S314).
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is multiple until the display of the information screen is limited, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to store.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed more than once due to a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is limited, it is recorded as one setting history information. To be done. As a result, it is possible for a person who has changed the setting, confirmed the setting, browsed the information screen, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create many browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or confirming the set value, browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through a process in which the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). It is possible to do so, and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories, so that the effect is great.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-8. 22nd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information capable of distinguishing whether the one setting value is changed or the one setting value is confirmed (for example, A transmission means capable of transmitting a setting operation command (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55),
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as and history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen),
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, when a fraud accompanied by a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the setting that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator. Is hard to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Further, it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the setting value is checked and the information screen is browsed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display unit can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of history records from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud.

It should be noted that "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" By storing only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed” and “both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means", but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. From the viewpoint, the former is preferable.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-9. 23rd game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, a history erasing means (for example, a history erasing means for executing control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means) , A sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S306).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203), but since the history information amount that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, it is stored in the second storage means. When the amount of history information increases, there is a possibility that history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to record it in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased to record new history information. It prevents the occurrence of situations such as being unable to do so.

Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" means The history information may be erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. At this time, if there is a possibility that the amount exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased before storing the history information. Further, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage means, if more history information is stored in the second storage means and the upper limit may be exceeded, the history information is stored in the second storage means. You may make it erase|eliminate at least one part of the historical information which exists.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. A screen limiting means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when it is determined to be NO in step S301, a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when it is determined to be YES in step S314) ..

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fourth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-10. 24th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value or the one setting value is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting confirmation state that can be performed,
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting change state or/and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state or/and the setting A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends,
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, even if the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without restricting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses (for example, step S310, step S311). Process can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that the display of the information screen is not limited as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The processing in steps S311 to S314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to browse at least the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as the history information, so that various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured, for example, that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends, as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the setting value information about the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display unit.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful for sales, and therefore can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, when the receiving unit receives the specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. It has a forced termination means for terminating the display of (for example, the sub CPU 201 which executes the processing of step S315 when YES is determined in step S314).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when the receiving device receives the specific information related to the progress of the game. The game is not interrupted because the game ends. Therefore, it is possible to secure the convenience of the operation by the authorized person while suppressing the state in which the game can be executed, and to prevent the fraud by the unauthorized third party.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, it is possible to grasp that the game can be executed without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, While all the LEDs 25 are lit in white while changing the settings or checking the settings, all the LEDs 25 are lit in red when the settings are changed or checked.)
It is characterized by

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, a state in which the game can be executed without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to understand that, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed even though the game can be executed and the game cannot be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-fifth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-11. 25th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when the initialization command or the power interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen for a hole menu item) on the display unit in which various kinds of information can be displayed in the setting state. Then
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall screen) where the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. A plurality of information screens including at least a menu screen),
The display control means,
A screen updating unit that controls to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display unit (for example, step A sub CPU 201) that executes the processes of S3051, S3057, S3073, etc.;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. If none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, a specific display control unit that controls the display of the history screen to be ended (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S315 when YES is determined in step S3072).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the history screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information can be browsed, various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value was changed or the setting value was confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, the history screen is browsed to check whether the above-mentioned fraud has been performed. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, non-history screens that do not show history information are continuously displayed even if a predetermined operation is not performed, but history screens that show history information are terminated unless a predetermined operation is performed for a predetermined time or longer. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and being viewed by an unauthorized third party. It should be noted that the above-mentioned “continuously displaying” also includes ending the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the predetermined operation is displayed or not even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When the history screen is displayed on the display unit in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful for sales, and therefore can be used for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a twenty-sixth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-7-12. The 26th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and information about the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100),
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the first storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed is set. Setting change state control means for controlling (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24),
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the changed setting value information when the setting value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. A transmission unit (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting change information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting change information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as the history information,
At least an information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means in the setting change state,
Erase execution information informing means capable of informing that the erase process has been executed (for example, the display control circuit 104, the voice control circuit 205 for controlling the voice output of the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25). And have,
The erasure execution information notification means,
When the erase process (for example, backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, it is possible to know that the erase process is executed (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). A first notification means (sub CPU 201) for displaying a character display such as "RAM cleared", a voice output such as "RAM cleared", and LED 25 (all red lighting).
It is more difficult to understand that the erasing process is executed so that the visibility of the information screen is not hindered when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state. Second notification means (for example, not displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 and outputting a voice such as “setting changed. RAM is initialized” and LED 25 all red lighting) ( And a sub CPU 201).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least the information screen in which the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information are shown as history information can be browsed, so that various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, when there is a possibility that unauthorized persons have changed the setting values for the purpose of fraud, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to trace whether or not the above fraud has been performed. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled to the setting change state and is controlled to the setting change state. It may be executed by When the erasing process is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the first mode that allows the user to know that the erasing process has been executed is notified. For example, the erasing process is executed by an unauthorized third party. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is harder to understand than the first mode. Further, when the erasing process is executed due to the control to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second mode, the visual confirmation of the information screen is not disturbed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, it is possible to ensure convenience.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a voice output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined voice,
The second control means is
It further has a voice control means (for example, a voice control circuit 206) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output means,
The first notification means,
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the voice output unit,
The second notification means,
The fact that the erasing process is executed is configured to be informed by using only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, both the display means and the voice output means are used for notification. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of the control being changed to the setting change state, only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means is used to notify, so that the visibility of the information screen is obstructed. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the deletion, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party while improving the convenience.

According to the fifteenth to twenty-sixth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[4-8. 27th Gaming Machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Eighth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as that the control is changed or the control board is illegally replaced.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, a twenty-seventh gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When at least the setting operation means is operated, a setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting value to change or confirm the one setting value. )When,
Storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information for at least the one setting value,
Transmission means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means and capable of transmitting at least the setting value information for the one setting value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55). And have,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, the propriety of the one setting value is determined by using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information. Setting determination means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that determines whether or not the previously set value and the currently set value match),
An abnormal condition process executing unit that executes an abnormal condition process when the one of the set values is determined to be inappropriate by the setting judgment unit (for example, a sub CPU 201 that executes the abnormal set value process). Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of the one set value, the one set value is normal when, for example, the first control means is illegally replaced. Whether the setting value is normal or abnormal, the first control unit determines that the one set value is normal. Therefore, by allowing the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, for example, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, It becomes possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage unit capable of storing history information. Means (eg, work RAM 203),
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information on a predetermined display unit based on a predetermined operation. Is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, when transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting unit capable of transmitting various information to the second control unit may transmit these information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the twenty-seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[4-9. 28th gaming machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having one device having a plurality of functions has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-170505, a player is pushed down and, in order to give an impact to the player, pops out to a position that largely protrudes from the main body of the game machine, regardless of the operation of the player. A push button is disclosed.

(9th subject)
By the way, when confirming the operation of the accessory, various sensors, and the like, the maintainability of a device having a plurality of functions such as a push button described in JP 2012-170505 A is deteriorated. There is a concern.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. is there.

In order to solve the ninth problem, a twenty-eighth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
An accessory (eg, an accessory 1000) that can be operated based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means (for example, a production button 62) having one or more functions,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
At least a maintenance item determination unit that determines a maintenance item to be executed out of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex unit, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, the process of step S3084). Executable sub CPU 201),
In deciding the maintenance item, a selection screen that allows selection of any of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex unit, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, in FIG. 74). A maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least a maintenance screen (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083),
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
With respect to the compounding means having a plurality of functions even though it is one, the selection screen is configured to be displayable so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, an item of "production button 1" in FIG. (Displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), with regard to the compound means having one function, but having a plurality of functions, it is possible to select an item for each function on the selection screen in which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The composite means is
At least, it has an operation function and a production function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determination means,
When the item of the operation function (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, it is determined as the maintenance item for the operation function, and the item of the effect function (for example, effect button 2) is selected. In this case, the maintenance item related to the performance function can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the twenty-eighth gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[4-10. 29th game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery that is performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory that operates based on a result of the lottery is known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine provided with a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory each having a different drive source as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See JP-A-2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, for example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-15273, which includes a plurality of movable accessory having different drive sources, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessory objects having different drive sources will interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to be able to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessory members having different drive sources are provided. Providing a gaming machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, a twenty-ninth gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
A first accessory and a second accessory that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Maintenance item determining means for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, step A sub CPU 201) capable of executing the process of S3084,
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen capable of selecting any of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, , Maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 74 (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3083),
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
Not only the operation confirmation of each of the first accessory and the second accessory, but also the operation confirmation when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated are selected on the selection screen. It is configured so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of “effect product 1+2” in FIG. 74 is displayed).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The operation confirmation when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Production accessory 1→2" in FIG. 74). Items are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since it is possible to select the operation confirmation when the is operated on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A third accessory that is operable based on the result of the lottery and has a driving source different from that of both the first accessory and the second accessory;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that they will interfere with each other when the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory operate, the first or/and the second accessory The selection screen can be displayed in a mode in which neither of the above and the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "effect product 1+3" in FIG. 74 cannot be selected. Become)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory both interfere with each other, the first screen or Since it is not possible to select the mode in which both the first accessory and/or the second accessory and the third accessory are operated, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

According to the twenty-ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[4-11. 30th and 31st game machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(11th subject)
By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, power failure.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirty gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-11-1. 30th game machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means controls the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S24,
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is performed in the setting change state. Possible or power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, an electric power cutoff occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, if the power is turned on after that, the setting control is performed or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the setting changed state when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is properly maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of unintended power interruption or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the set value setting means (for example, the set value setting means for setting the one set value to the changed set value). , Further having a main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S2480,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a thirty-first gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

[4-11-2. 31st gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means having means (for example, the main control circuit 100),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
According to the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means, the state after the power is turned on is a setting change state and the one setting in which the one set value can be changed. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.) capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state capable of confirming a value. Then
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, the processing of steps S22 to S28 is executed),
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and then the power is turned on, control is possible in the setting change state or the power supply is stopped regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. Power can be restored in the setting change state at that time (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. In other words, the setting confirmation state is a state in which only one set value can be confirmed but the one set value cannot be changed. Is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed, and therefore, for example, if an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is subsequently turned on, one of a plurality of states is set depending on the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. The power is restored so that the convenience of the operator is ensured and the situation in which the set value is not set due to unintentional power interruption or the like is prevented from occurring.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means,
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting change state is controlled.
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, a set value confirming means for confirming the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to the thirtieth and thirty-first gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[4-12. 32nd game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, the generation of noise or illegal acts.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, a thirty-second gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation unit (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage unit,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
Setting change state control means for controlling to a setting change state capable of changing the one set value when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24),
An adequacy determination unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate or not,
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the abnormality control unit (the process of Steps S722 to S727) that controls to an abnormal state (for example, the state in which the processes of Steps S722 to S727 are executed) Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. On the other hand, it is controlled so that it cannot be performed (for example, the processing of step S1790 is not executed when it is determined to be NO in step S1770), while the game is controlled to be executed when it is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on (for example, step It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the processing of step S17) which executes the processing of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or cheating, and the supply of power is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, it is highly possible that the one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal.Therefore, only when the one set value is controlled to the setting change state so that it is changed. The game is allowed to be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

According to the 32nd gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[4-13. 33rd game machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a thirty-third gaming machine having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on (for example, the setting key is turned on), the state control means controls the setting value so that the one set value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.),
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, a game executing means that can be controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 is not yet executed). Although not possible, when the setting process of step S20 ends, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables execution of the game, and the main CPU 101),
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least transmission means (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, operation type information). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means is
A receiving unit (for example, a command input port 208) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be executed in the setting state in which the game cannot be executed (for example, setting operation effect executing unit). , A sub CPU 201) that executes a control to turn on all the LEDs 25 in red through the LED control circuit 206,
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed until a predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state is finished and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the fraud when the setting value is changed or the setting value is checked fraudulently, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect execution means,
A mode in which after the setting state is finished and a game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized that the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable with.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually recognize that a game can be executed, It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the setting value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The state control means,
In addition to having setting change state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value,
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of limiting the display,
The display control means,
When the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received by the receiving unit, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not limited until a predetermined time elapses. It is characterized in that the information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S310 to S314 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the setting state, and the display of the information screen is limited when the setting state ends. Therefore, in the set state, by browsing the information screen showing the history information, it becomes possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall. Further, when the setting operation state information display is limited when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if a fraud is performed, it is possible to easily find such a fraud, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the thirty-third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[4-14. 34th to 46th gaming machines]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a big hit determination is made when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and when a result of the big hit is displayed, a big hit game state advantageous to a player is controlled.

In this type of gaming machine, the normal gaming state tends to be monotonous until it is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Further, even if the big hit game state is controlled, if the big hit game state ends, a monotonous game has to be performed again, which may reduce the interest.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, apart from the big hit game state, there has been known a game machine that shifts to a game state advantageous to a player. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800, when the 2-round big hit game state ends, the state shifts to a high-accuracy time saving state, and when a predetermined number of fluctuations elapses in the high-accuracy time saving state, the time saving state ends, and a small hit game is played. A gaming machine is disclosed in which a highly accurate non-time saving state that is easy to execute is entered.

(14th subject)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174800, after the 2-round big hit game state ends, the big hit game state ends after shifting to the high-precision non-time saving game state in which the small hit game is likely to be executed. Although it is possible to increase the interest as well, unless it is controlled to the big hit game state, it does not shift to the high-precision non-time saving game state, so the normal game state until it is controlled to the big hit game state tends to be monotonous Absent.

In order to solve the fourteenth problem, there are provided thirty-fourth to forty-sixth gaming machines capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

[4-14-1. 34th game machine]
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determinable using the specific table based on the satisfaction of a specific condition.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is included in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) having a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period (for example, a period for which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) that does not occur and a specific period (for example, , And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) having an expected value larger than that of the normal table during which the second start opening winning is determined) is included. Then, the specific condition is established, the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is performed, and if the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the game ball to the specific winning area It becomes easier to pass through and the prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value that occurs) becomes larger than the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the game ball moves the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) during the specific period. If the result of the second special lottery after passing is the specific result (for example, a small hit), it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded. Become. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed. The second special lottery can be performed only when the player has passed, and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

(4) Another example of the 34th gaming machine is
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch) through which a game ball that has been launched can pass,
A first special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on that the game ball has passed through the first special start area. )When,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means (eg, the main CPU 101) that can derive the result of the first special lottery as the result of the game When,
A second special starting area (for example, a second starting opening switch) through which a game ball that has been launched can pass,
Second special lottery means capable of performing a second special lottery having a specific result with a higher probability than the first special lottery, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area,
Variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol variable control means (eg, the main CPU 101) that can derive the result of the second special lottery as the result of the game When,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables. ,
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
A first table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively small,
A second table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively large,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol, the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the specific result. It is characterized in that it can be changed based on the above.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, based on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol The table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display is changed. Therefore, based on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery being the specific result, it is possible to change the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. Further, by setting a plurality of states in which the expected value of the prize per unit time is 1 or less, it is possible to realize a plurality of normal game states in which the expected value of the prize per unit time is different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous.

[4-14-2. 35th gaming machine]
(1) The 35th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
First special lottery means (for example, a first special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. , The main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
State control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to a normal game state in which the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is 1 or less,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
Of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, the length of a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) A plurality of tables having different expected values of the size (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “3” to “6”) are included,
The variable display pattern determining means,
In the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determined using any one of the plurality of tables.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, the second special drawing is executed. The second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) facilitates passage of the game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A plurality of tables having different expected values of the length of the specific period (for example, the period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed are included. Then, in the normal game state in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shots per unit time is 1 or less, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is configured to be determined using one of a plurality of tables. It The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, in the normal game state in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is 1 or less, by changing the table used to determine the variable display pattern of the first special symbol, it is given per unit time It is possible to control to one of a plurality of states in which the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls is different. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest in the gaming state, which tends to be monotonous.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The plurality of tables include
Of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a normal table configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period (for example, Fluctuation pattern table number "3"),
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) occurs. A first specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “4”) whose expected value is larger than the normal table,
Of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, the second specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “6”) in which the expected value in which the specific period occurs is larger than that in the first specific table. )When,
Is included at least.

According to the gaming machine of (2), when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the second special lottery is difficult to be executed. , When the determination is performed using the first specific table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “4”), the second determination is performed than when the determination is performed using the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”). If the special lottery is easy to be executed and the determination is made using the second specific table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “6”), the first specific table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “4”) is used. The second special lottery is more likely to be executed than in the case of being determined by the above. Therefore, it is possible to change the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls given per unit time only by changing the table used for determining the variable display pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and at least the first special symbol is changed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

[4-14-3. The 36th gaming machine]
(1) The 36th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
Based on the game ball passing through the first special starting area, it is possible to perform a first special lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit) and a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in a lottery result. A first special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO),
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
Second special lottery means capable of performing a second special lottery including the special result and the specific result in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area (for example, the processing of step S1213 is If YES, the main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1219,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined using the specific table based on that the specific result is derived as the result of the first special lottery,
When the derived result of the first special lottery is the first specific result (for example, the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of "z11" or "z12"), in a predetermined number of predetermined games Determined using the specific table, after the prescribed number of games have been played, it is possible to determine using the normal table,
When the derived result of the first special lottery is the second specific result (for example, a small hit of the winning selection symbol command "z18"), the specific table is used until the special game is executed. It is characterized by being configured so that it can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, the second special drawing is executed. The second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) facilitates passage of the game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period during which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table in which an expected value in which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth winning is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than a normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”). .. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A regular table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value during which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than the normal table. include. Then, when the derived result of the first special lottery is the first specific result (for example, the winning selection symbol command is "z11" or "z12" small hit), the first special is used by using the specific table. Although the game in which the variable display pattern of symbols is determined is executed, this game ends when the game is executed a predetermined number of times determined in advance. On the other hand, when the derived result of the first special lottery is the second specific result (for example, the winning selection symbol command is a small hit of “z18”), until the special game is executed, that is, the first special The variable display pattern of the first special symbol may be determined using the specific table until a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived by variably displaying the symbol or the second special symbol. There is. In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the execution period of the game in which the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table It is possible to make different depending on the type, and it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in interest in the gaming state, which tends to be monotonous.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The variable display pattern determining means,
Even if the derived result of the first special lottery is a second specific result (for example, a small hit) (for example, a small hit when the winning selection symbol command is "z18"), the special game is executed. If, as a result of the first special lottery, the first specific result (for example, a small hit) is derived before the special game is not executed, the specific table (for example, a variation pattern) It is characterized in that the game for deciding the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is finished by using the table numbers "4" to "6").

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the derived result of the first special lottery is the second specific result (for example, the small hit of the winning selection symbol command is "z18"), the special game. When the first specific result (for example, the small hit of the winning selection symbol command of "z11" or "z12") is derived before the execution of the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table number "4"- The game in which the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using “6”) ends midway. Therefore, even if the derived first special lottery result is the second specific result, it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension without reassuring the player.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and at least the first special symbol is changed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-4. 37th Gaming Machine]
(1) The 37th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
A normal game state in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is smaller than 1, a specific game state in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is smaller than 1 but larger than the normal game state, And a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states including a special game state in which the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is larger than 1.
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
Used in the normal gaming state, of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, the second starting opening winning is effective. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) whose expected value is relatively small
A specific table that is used in the specific gaming state and has a larger expected value than the normal table during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode (for example, fluctuation pattern table number "4"-"6"),
A special table that is used in the specific game state and has a larger expected value than the specific table during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode (see, for example, fluctuation pattern table number “ 12”),
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined using the specific table for a predetermined period based on the specific condition being satisfied, and based on the special condition being satisfied. It is characterized in that it can be determined using the special table for a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, the second special drawing is executed. The second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) facilitates passage of the game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period during which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table in which an expected value in which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth winning is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than a normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”). .. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) or a special table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “12”), The expected value during which the specific period (for example, the period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than that in the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), and the specific period (for example, the second starting port). During the period when it is determined that the winning is valid), the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, a small hit). Then, it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded. Thereby, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table or the special table (for example, the variation pattern table number “12”) without being controlled to the special game state such as the conventional big hit game state. When a game is played, a prize is easily awarded, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in a gaming state that tends to be monotonous.

The variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using a specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) when the specific condition is satisfied, and from the specific table when the special condition is satisfied. Is also determined using a special table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “12”) having a high expected value in which a specific period (for example, a period during which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs. That is, when the special condition is satisfied, it becomes easier for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) than when the special condition is satisfied, and the prize is easily awarded. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game play in which the expected value of the prize for the number of balls to be fired per unit time is different when the specific condition is satisfied and when the special condition is satisfied.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not reserved and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-5. 38th gaming machine]
(1) The 38th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
A prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area,
The profit degree of the prize given to the player when the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode and the game ball passes through the second special starting area is changed based on the establishment of the specific condition. Profit rate changing means to control,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
Of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a normal table (for example, a variation pattern table number " 3”),
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) occurs. A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) that can be determined as a variable display pattern,
With at least
The awarding means is
When a game ball passes through the second special starting area, a first prize is awarded, and when a game ball passes through the specific winning area, a second prize is further awarded.
The profit changing means is
The determination of the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is always performed by using the normal table, and by using the specific table based on the establishment of the specific condition, the first Of the first prize and the second prize, and a mode in which both the first prize and the second prize can be awarded. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is included in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) having a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period (for example, a period for which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) that does not occur and a specific period (for example, , And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) having an expected value larger than that of the normal table during which the second start opening winning is determined) is included. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

By the way, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the first prize is awarded, and the game ball passes through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521). The second prize is awarded when the game is performed. The variable display pattern of the first special symbol is always determined by using the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the specific table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”) is determined based on the satisfaction of the specific condition. 4" to "6"). That is, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the first prize is always awarded, but when the specific condition is satisfied, the second prize is also awarded in addition to the first prize. Becomes Therefore, the value of the award given when the game ball is won in the second special starting area is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not, which realizes a new gaming property that has never existed before. It becomes possible to do.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

[4-14-6. 39th game machine]
(1) The 39th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
First special lottery means (for example, a first special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. , The main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, the plurality of specific tables (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which the expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table. )When,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
A specific pattern determination means that can determine the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol by using the specific table based on that the specific result is derived as the result of the first special lottery. Have
Further, in the plurality of specific tables,
A plurality of specific tables having different expected values of the length of the specific period are included,
The specific pattern determining means,
A variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determined according to a type of the specific result derived as a result of the first special lottery among the plurality of specific tables. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period during which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) ) And a plurality of specific tables (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value for which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) is larger than the normal table And are included. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Further, the plurality of specific tables (for example, the fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) have different expected values of the length of the specific period (for example, the period in which the second starting mouth winning is determined to be valid). A plurality of specific tables are included, and the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is a specific result derived as a result of the first special lottery among the plurality of specific tables (for example, a small hit). ) Is determined according to the type. That is, the length of the specific period in the period in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode varies depending on the type of the specific result (for example, small hit). Therefore, it becomes possible to make it easier to pass the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) depending on the type of the specific result.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed. The second special lottery may be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-7. 40th game machine]
(1) The 40th game machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol can be determined using the specific table based on the fact that the specific result is derived as the result of the first special lottery,
Even if the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery, it is determined using the normal table until the game is played a predetermined number of times, and then the specific table is played after the game is played the predetermined number of times. It is characterized in that it can be determined by using it.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. In addition, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value is generated, and a specific period is generated. A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) whose expected value is larger than the normal table is included. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

In addition, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is a normal table (for example, a variation pattern table number) until the game is performed a predetermined number of times even if a specific result (for example, a small hit) is derived as a result of the first special lottery. “3”) is used, and after a predetermined number of games have been played, it can be determined using a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). That is, based on the fact that a specific result (for example, a small hit) is derived, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass through a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521), and immediately after that, a specific table is used. The variable display pattern of the first special symbol is not to be determined, but the variable display pattern of the first special symbol can be determined by using the specific table after the game has been played a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even after the game ball is easily passed to the specific winning area based on the derivation of the specific result, even if the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is not immediately determined using the specific table, the player The discouragement given to the player can be reduced, and the player can expect the game even in the subsequent game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-8. 41st Gaming Machine]
(1) The 41st game machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
First special lottery means (for example, a first special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. , The main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
An effect control unit (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls an effect image to be displayed in a predetermined display area (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16),
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
As a result of the first special lottery, a first specific result (for example, a small hit) among the plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) (for example, when the winning selection symbol command is “z11” or “z12”) (Small hit) is derived, the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol, the normal table until the game is performed a predetermined number of times after the result of the first special lottery is derived. Is determined using the specific table after the game has been played the predetermined number of times (for example, the process of step S1617 is executed when the game mode is "11" or "12"). Main CPU 101),
As a result of the first special lottery, a second specific result (for example, a small hit) out of the plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) (for example, a small hit for which the winning selection symbol command is "z18") is When derived, a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table without using the specific table (for example, the process of step S1620). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Have
The effect control means,
Whether the result of the first special lottery is the first specific result (for example, a small hit) or the second specific result (for example, a small hit), the result of the first special lottery is derived. After the game is played at least the predetermined number of times, the result of the first special lottery is the first specific result (for example, a small hit) or the second specific result (for example, a small hit). It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a production that is difficult to grasp from the outside.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A regular table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value during which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than the normal table. include. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Further, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol, when the first specific result (for example, the winning symbol selection symbol command "z11" or "z12" small hit) is derived as the result of the first special lottery , From the result of the first special lottery is derived until the game is played a predetermined number of times, it is determined using a normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number "3"), after the game of a predetermined number of times, It is determined using a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). On the other hand, when a second specific result (for example, a small hit when the winning selection symbol command is "z18") is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table. Is not determined, but is determined using a normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”). That is, as a result of the first special lottery, the first specific result (for example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z11" or "z12" small hit) is derived, and the second specific result (for example, the winning time. In any case where the selected symbol command "small hit of "z18") is derived, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is first determined using the normal table, but the predetermined number of games have been played. There is a big difference in whether or not it is later determined using a specific table. Further, in both the case where the first specific result is derived as the result of the first special lottery and the case where the second specific result is derived, until the game is performed a predetermined number of times, the first special lottery Since the production in which it is difficult to grasp visually whether the result is the first specific result or the second specific result is executed, the enjoyment of the game during this period can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed. The second special lottery can be performed only when the player has passed, and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-9. 42nd game machine]
(1) The 42nd gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
First special lottery means (for example, a first special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. , The main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
At least a game progress pattern set in any one of a plurality of game progress patterns in which the table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol changes according to the progress of the game. A pattern setting unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1615),
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
In the plurality of game progress patterns,
A plurality of game progress patterns including at least a specific game period in which the game for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is performed once or a plurality of times using the specific table are prepared. ,
The game progression pattern setting means,
The game progress pattern is configured to be set to any one of the plurality of game progress patterns.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is included in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) having a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period (for example, a period for which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) that does not occur and a specific period (for example, , And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) having an expected value larger than that of the normal table during which the second start opening winning is determined) is included. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Moreover, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined by using a specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), and the game is performed once or a plurality of times. A plurality of game progress patterns including at least a specific game period are prepared, and the game is configured to proceed in any of the plurality of game progress patterns. Therefore, the progress pattern of the game can have variations, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.
(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific table includes
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a plurality of specific tables (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) having different expected values of the length of the specific period are included. With
In the plurality of game progress patterns,
A normal game period (for example, a period in which the LG state is controlled) in which the game for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is performed once or a plurality of times using the normal table,
Of the plurality of specific tables, one specific table (for example, the variation pattern table number “4”) is used to determine the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol once or a plurality of times. One specific game period (for example, a period controlled to the SHG state) that is played over,
A game of determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol by using another specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “5” and “6”) of the plurality of specific tables Other specific game period played once or a plurality of times (for example, a period controlled to BHG state or MHG state),
It is characterized in that a plurality of game progress patterns including at least two or more game periods are prepared.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”) is used to determine the variable display pattern of the first special symbol. Time period) and one of a plurality of specific tables having different expected values of the length of the specific period (for example, the period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) are different from each other (for example, the variation pattern table number “4”). )), one specific game period in which the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined (for example, a period in which the SHG state is controlled), and a specific period (for example, the second starting opening winning a prize is determined to be effective). The variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using another specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “5” and “6”) whose expected value of the length of the period is different from the one specific table. Among other specific game periods (for example, periods controlled to the BHG state and the MHG state), a game is played in any one of a plurality of game progress patterns including at least two game periods. Can progress. Therefore, the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set game progression pattern, and it becomes possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery can be performed and a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is easily changed by changing the ratio between the case of determining using the normal table and the case of determining using the specific table. It becomes possible to change to.

[4-14-10. 43rd Gaming Machine]
(1) The 43rd gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
First special lottery means (for example, a first special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a plurality of types of specific results (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. , The main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
At least a game progress pattern set in any one of a plurality of game progress patterns in which the table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol changes according to the progress of the game. A pattern setting unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1615),
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
An effect control means for performing a predetermined effect (for example, the sub CPU 201),
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, at least one or more specific tables (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “where the expected value for the specific period is larger than the normal table” are larger than the normal table. 6”),
Is included at least,
In the plurality of game progress patterns,
A variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth winning is determined to be valid), and the specific period (for example, , A normal period that is determined using the normal table after the end of the second start opening winning a prize) and a specific period that is further determined using the specific table after the normal period ends (for example, The first game progress pattern (for example, the game progress pattern when it is set to the game mode “15”) including 2 starting mouth prizes are determined to be valid, and the game progress until the specific period ends. A second game progression pattern whose pattern is the same as the first game progression pattern (for example, a game progression pattern when the game mode is set to "16"),
Is included, and when the specific period in the second game progress pattern ends, the second game progress pattern ends, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the normal table, Configured to make a decision using
The effect control means,
It is characterized in that it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp in terms of appearance and appearance performed in the normal period of the first game progression pattern until a predetermined period of time elapses after the second game progression pattern ends.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A regular table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value during which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than the normal table. include. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Further, at least the table used for determining the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is configured so that the game can proceed in any of a plurality of game progress patterns that change according to the progress of the game. In the plurality of game progress patterns described above, a specific period (for example, the second starting opening) for determining the variable display pattern of the first special symbol using a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). A period during which the winning is determined to be valid), and a normal period after which the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using a normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”) after the end of the specific period, and the normal A first game progress pattern including a specific period after the end of the period (for example, a game progress pattern when the game mode is set to “15”), and a game progress pattern until the end of the specific period is the first game. At least the same second game progress pattern as the progress pattern (for example, the game progress pattern when set in the game mode “16”) is included. Further, until the predetermined period elapses after the end of the second game progress pattern, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp by the effect and the appearance performed in the normal period of the first game progress pattern. Therefore, after the specific period for determining the variable display pattern of the first special symbol using the specific table ends, the specific period for determining the variable display pattern of the first special symbol using the specific table comes. It is difficult for the player to immediately grasp whether or not, and the game is advanced with the expectation of the arrival of the specific period, and the interest of the game during this period can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and the first special symbol is variably displayed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in a state where is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441) can the specific result (for example, a small hit). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-1. The 44th gaming machine]
(1) The 44th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determined using the specific table based on the specific condition being satisfied,
The gaming machine further comprises
After one gaming ball passes through the first special starting area, after a time longer than the variable display time of the shortest variable display pattern with the shortest variable display time of the first special symbol in the normal table has passed. In addition, a holding suppression means (for example, a delivery member 820) configured to pass another game ball to the first special starting area is provided.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period during which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which the expected value in which the specific period occurs is larger than the normal table. Then, the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, small hit). Then, it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Further, this gaming machine is the first in the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) after one gaming ball has passed through the first special starting area (for example, the first starting opening switch 421). After a longer time than the variable display time of the shortest variable display pattern of the shortest variable display pattern of the shortest variable display time of the special symbol, another game ball is passed through the first special starting area. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol can be prevented from being continuously performed, and the specific period (for example, the period in which the second starting winning a prize is determined to be valid) can be suppressed by the variable display of the first special symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that does not occur.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not reserved and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

[4-14-2. The 45th game machine]
(1) The 45th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area, the lottery result includes a special result (for example, a big hit) and a specific result (for example, a small hit) even though almost all of the lottery results are lost. A first special lottery means capable of performing one special lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO),
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, the process of step S1312 A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area, a special result (for example, a big hit) and a specific result (for example, a small hit) are included in the lottery result. When the special result is not obtained, all or a lottery result is obtained. Second special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is YES) capable of performing the second special lottery in which substantially all of the results are the specific result,
Variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery, the second special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the second special lottery as a result of the game (for example, the process of step S1315 A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the special game state advantageous to the player based on the special result being derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery,
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The game state control means,
At least the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is relatively small by the variable display pattern provided for at least the variable display of the first special symbol being determined using the normal table (the first gaming state ( For example, a first game state (for example, LG state) control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling to the LG state,
When the game is executed a certain number of times (for example, 510 ceiling games) in the first game state, at least the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table. A second game state (eg, HG state) control means for controlling to a second game state (eg, HG state) in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is larger than the first game state by ( For example, the main CPU 101),
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the special result, after a special game state based on the special result (for example, a big hit) is finished, a predetermined number of times (for example, a reduced number of times) of games Until it is executed, the expected value of the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is controlled to a third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) that is smaller than the second game state. Time saving game state) control means (for example, the main CPU 101),
Game state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control for shifting from one game state to another game state,
Have
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the special result, the specified number of times can be determined as a different number of times depending on the type of the special result (for example, a big hit). ,
The game state transition control means,
When the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the third game state, the third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) may differ depending on the type of the special result. When the specified number of games have been executed, first transfer control means for transferring the third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) to the first game state,
After the transition from the third gaming state to the first gaming state, regardless of the specified number of games executed in the third gaming state, the certain number of times in the first gaming state (eg, LG state) And a second shift control means for shifting to the second game state based on the execution of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. In addition, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value is generated, and a specific period is generated. A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) whose expected value is larger than the normal table is included. Then, when the game balls pass through the second special starting area and the second special lottery is carried out, almost all of the lottery results in the second special lottery become the specific result (for example, a small hit), so the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value that occurs) becomes larger than the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the game ball moves the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) during the specific period. When it passes, almost all of it becomes a specific result (for example, a small hit), and it becomes easy for the game ball to pass to a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521), and a prize is easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

Furthermore, when the game is executed a certain number of times in the first game state (for example, LG state) in which the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, variation pattern table number “3”). , The variable display pattern of the first special symbol shifts to the second game state (for example, the HG state) which is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), so for a long time Even if the special game state is not controlled, it is possible to reduce the mental burden on the player.

Further, when the third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) is controlled after the special game state ends, a predetermined number of games are played in this third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state). When is executed, the first game state (eg, LG state) is entered. However, since the specified number of times can be determined to be different depending on the type of the special result (for example, big hit), the number of games until the third gaming state shifts to the first gaming state according to the type of the special result. Can be different. Further, when a certain number of games are executed in the first game state, the game state shifts to the second game state (for example, HG state), but since this certain number of times is the number of times executed in the first game state, The specified number of times (that is, the number of games in the third gaming state) does not affect the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. Therefore, the smaller the prescribed number of times, the greater the advantage for the player. In this way, by varying the prescribed number of times according to the type of special result, it is possible to give variations in the number of games from the end of the big hit game state to the control to the HG state, which is interesting. It is possible to raise it.

It should be noted that instead of "the specified number of times is determined differently depending on the type of special result (for example, big hit)", "this specified number of times may be determined differently depending on the type of special result" It is assumed that the specified number of times may be the same even if the types of special results are different.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
An effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for executing a predetermined effect is further provided,
The effect control means,
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult to grasp by appearance whether it is controlled to the first gaming state or the third gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to visually recognize whether the gaming machine is controlled to the first gaming state (eg, LG state) or the third gaming state (eg, low-probability time short gaming state). By performing the difficult production, it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game state until it is controlled to the second game state (for example, the HG state).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not held and at least the first special symbol is changed. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where the display is not performed. That is, when a game ball passes through the second special starting area, almost all of the game balls do not become a specific result (for example, a small hit), but at least the second special symbol in a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The specific result can be obtained only when the game ball passes through the starting area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) and (2) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed over substantially the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”) and the specific table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) It is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit) only by changing the ratio of the case of using and determining.

[4-14-13. 46th Gaming Machine]
(1) The 46th gaming machine
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and the special symbol is variably displayed, and once the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped, the game is played once. A gaming machine from which the results of
Volatile storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing various information relating to the game, including setting value information about the one setting value,
When a predetermined erasing operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330) or an operation of changing the one set value is performed, various information stored in the volatile storage unit can be deleted or changed. An information erasing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S39 or step S2420),
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
It is possible to perform a first special lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit) and a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area. Special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1219 when the process of step S1213 is NO),
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, the process of step S1312 A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
Second special lottery means (for example, the process of step S1213) that includes a special result (for example, big hit) and a specific result (for example, small hit) in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special start area. Is YES, the main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1219,
Variable display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery, the second special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the second special lottery as a result of the game (for example, the process of step S1315 A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of
Non-volatile storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using any one of the plurality of tables (for example, the process of step S1221). Main CPU 101) that executes
Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the special game state advantageous to the player based on the special result being derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery,
Based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, a specific winning area (for example, a small hit winning opening switch 521) that facilitates the passage of game balls,
Prize giving means (for example, a payout device 340) for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The game state control means,
At least the expected value of the prize with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is relatively small by the variable display pattern provided for at least the variable display of the first special symbol being determined using the normal table (the first gaming state ( For example, a first game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the LG state),
When a game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 ceiling games) in the first game state, at least a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table. Second game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the second game state (for example, HG state) in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shots per unit time is larger than the first game state by being performed. When,
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the special result, after a special game state based on the special result (for example, a big hit) is finished, a predetermined number of times (for example, a reduced number of times) of games are played. Until executed, the third game state control means (for example, a third game state control means for controlling to a third game state in which the expected value of the prize for the number of shots per unit time is smaller than the second game state (for example, a low certainty time short game state)) , Main CPU 101),
Game state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control for shifting from one game state to another game state,
Have
The game state transition control means,
When the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the third game state, when the predetermined number of games are executed in the third game state (for example, the low certainty time short game state), First transition control means for shifting from the third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) to the first game state (for example, LG state),
After shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state, shift to the second gaming state based on the execution of the predetermined number of games in the first gaming state (eg, LG state). Second transition control means,
Has
The volatile storage means is
A first storage area (for example, an area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) that stores at least the number-of-games information executed in the first gaming state;
A second storage area (for example, a main storage area) that stores at least game state information indicating that the game state information is controlled to the third game state and the number-of-games information executed in the third game state (for example, a low certainty time short game state). Area of F1A0 to F1AF of RAM 103),
Has
The information erasing means,
When the predetermined erasing operation is performed, a first erasing unit that erases or changes both the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area (for example, in step S2426A). A main CPU 101) that executes processing,
Of the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area, only the information stored in the second storage area when the operation of changing the one setting value is performed. And a second erasing unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2424A) for erasing or changing the.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. In addition, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. A normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value is generated, and a specific period is generated. A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) whose expected value is larger than the normal table is included. Then, when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, a small hit), the specific winning area (For example, it becomes easy for a game ball to pass to the small hit winning opening switch 521) and a prize is easily awarded. The award given by the award ball giving means corresponds to, for example, an award ball or award ball data.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value that occurs) becomes larger than the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the game ball moves the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) during the specific period. If the result of the second special lottery after passing is the specific result (for example, a small hit), it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded. Become. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

In addition, when the third game state (for example, low-probability time short game state) is controlled after the special game state ends, a predetermined number of games are played in this third game state (for example, low-probability time short game state). When is executed (for example, when the time saving game is digested), the first game state (for example, LG state) is entered.

Then, when the specified number of games are executed in the third game state and the game state shifts to the first game state, the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”). When the game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of the ceiling game number) in the first game state (for example, LG state), the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined using the specific table. Since a game state (for example, an HG state) is entered, it is possible to reduce the mental burden on the player even if the special game state is not controlled for a long time.

The above-mentioned predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of ceiling games) may always be a fixed number of times, or may be changed according to a predetermined condition.

Here, the volatile storage means has at least a first storage area (for example, an area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) and a second storage area (for example, an area of F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103). The number-of-games information executed in one gaming state (for example, LG state) is stored in the first storage area (for example, the area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103), and the third gaming state (for example, low-probability-time short gaming state). In the second storage area (for example, the area of F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103), the game state information indicating that the game state information is controlled to and the number-of-games information executed in the third gaming state (for example, the low-probability time short gaming state) Memorized in. Then, when a predetermined erasing operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330) is performed as an operation for erasing or changing the information stored in the volatile storage unit, the first storage area (for example, the main storage area) Both the information stored in the F1B0 to F1BD areas of the RAM 103 and the information stored in the second storage area (for example, the F1A0 to F1AF areas of the main RAM 103) are erased or changed. On the other hand, when the operation of changing one set value is performed, the information stored in the first storage area (for example, the area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) is saved while the second storage area (for example, , The information stored in the areas F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103) is deleted or changed. Therefore, when both the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area are erased or changed, the predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of ceiling games) is not set. The game in the first game state (for example, LG state) (that is, the first game state of the blue ceiling) will be started. On the other hand, when only the information stored in the second storage area is deleted or changed while the information stored in the first storage area is saved, a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of ceiling games) is set. The game in the first game state (for example, the LG state) can be started. Therefore, for example, the gaming machine manager is controlled to the third gaming state (for example, a low-probability time short gaming state) while leaving the number-of-games information executed in the first gaming state (for example, LG state). It is possible to erase or change the game state information and the game number information executed in the third game state (for example, the low-probability time short game state) or change one set value.

It should be noted that the descriptions "erasing or changing information" and "both information are deleted or changed" not only mean that information stored in a volatile storage means is not erased, but also that information is overwritten, for example. This also includes the fact that the information stored until then is erased as a result. The same applies to the gaming machines of (2) to (6) described below.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game state control means,
When the information stored in the second storage area is erased or changed by the second erasing means while being controlled to the third gaming state, it is controlled to the first gaming state,
The second transfer control means,
When the information stored in the second storage area is erased or changed by the second erasing means while being controlled to the third game state, the third game state (for example, a low certainty time short game state) Regardless of the number of games executed in, the game machine is configured to shift to the second game state based on the predetermined number of times the game is executed in the first game state.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, it is stored in the second storage area (for example, the area of F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103) when being controlled to the third gaming state (for example, the low-probability time short gaming state). When the information to be erased or changed by the second erasing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2424A) is controlled to the first game state (for example, LG state), but the third game state (for example, , Regardless of the number of games executed in the low certainty time short game state), when a predetermined number of games are executed in the first game state (eg, LG state), the game state shifts to the second game state (eg, HG state). .. Therefore, it becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the hall is opened.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the special result, the specified number of times can be determined as a different number of times depending on the type of the special result (for example, a big hit). ,
The second transfer control means,
After shifting from the third game state to the first game state, the predetermined number of times in the first game state (for example, LG state) regardless of the specified number of games executed in the third game state. It is configured to shift to the second game state based on the execution of the game.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the prescribed number of times can be determined to be different depending on the type of special result (for example, big hit), so the third game can be decided according to the type of special result (for example, big hit). The number of games from the state (for example, the low-probability short-time gaming state) to the first gaming state (for example, the LG state) may be different. Also, when the game is executed a predetermined number of times in the first game state (for example, LG state), the game state shifts to the second game state (for example, HG state), but the predetermined number of times is the first game state (for example, LG). Since it is the number of times executed in the state), the specified number of times (that is, the third gaming state (for example, low) when shifting from the first gaming state (for example, LG state) to the second gaming state (for example, HG state). The number of games in the exact short time game state) does not affect. Therefore, the smaller the prescribed number of times, the greater the advantage for the player. In this way, by varying the specified number of times according to the type of special result (eg, big hit), it is possible to give variations in the number of games from the end of the big hit game state to the control of the HG state. It is possible to increase interest and interest.

It should be noted that instead of "this specified number of times is determined differently depending on the type of special result", "this specified number of times can be determined differently depending on the type of special result" is the special result It is assumed that the specified number of times may be the same even if the types of the are different.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
An effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for executing a predetermined effect is further provided,
The effect control means,
It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect that is difficult to grasp by appearance whether it is controlled to the first gaming state or the third gaming state.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, it is possible to visually recognize whether the gaming machine is controlled to the first gaming state (eg, LG state) or the third gaming state (eg, low-probability time short gaming state). By performing the difficult production, it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game state until it is controlled to the second game state (for example, the HG state).

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (5), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not reserved, and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where the display is not performed. In other words, when a game ball passes through the second special starting area, almost all of it does not become a specific result (for example, a small hit), but at least the second special in a state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. Only when the game ball passes through the starting area, a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area from becoming excessively large, and it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous.

(6) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and the special symbol is variably displayed, and once the special symbol that is variably displayed is stopped, the game is played once. A gaming machine from which the results of
Volatile storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing various information relating to the game, including setting value information about the one setting value,
When a predetermined erasing operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330) or an operation of changing the one set value is performed, various information stored in the volatile storage unit can be deleted or changed. An information erasing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S39 or step S2420),
A special starting area (for example, the first starting opening switch 421) through which the launched game ball can pass,
Special lottery means capable of performing a special lottery including a special result (for example, a big hit) based on the game ball having passed through the special starting area (for example, when the process of step S1213 is NO, step S1219). Main CPU 101) that executes the processing of
A variable display of special symbols is performed based on the result of the special lottery, and a special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the special lottery as a result of the game (for example, based on the result of the process of step S1312, step S1013). A main CPU 101) that executes processing,
Non-volatile storage means (for example, the main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of tables used to determine the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1221) that determines the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the special symbol by using one of the plurality of tables,
Special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the special game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the special result is derived as the result of the special lottery,
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states,
Equipped with
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
Normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal table,
Is included at least,
The game state control means,
A first game state control means (for example, a first game state control means for controlling to a relatively disadvantageous first game state (for example, LG state) in which the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the special symbol is determined by using the normal table. Main CPU 101),
When a game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 ceiling games) in the first game state, a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the special symbol is determined using the specific table. Second game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling to a second game state (for example, HG state) which is relatively more advantageous than 1 game state,
When the result of the special lottery is the special result, after the special game state based on the special result (for example, a big hit) is finished, until the game is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, a reduced number of times), the first game Third game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the state and a third game state (for example, low-probability time short game state) different from the second game state,
Game state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control for shifting from one game state to another game state,
Have
The game state transition control means,
When the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the third game state, when the predetermined number of games are executed in the third game state (for example, the low certainty time short game state), First transition control means for shifting from the third game state (for example, a low-probability time short game state) to the first game state (for example, LG state),
After shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state, shift to the second gaming state based on the execution of the predetermined number of games in the first gaming state (eg, LG state). Second transition control means,
Has
The volatile storage means is
A first storage area (for example, an area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) that stores at least the number-of-games information executed in the first gaming state;
A second storage area (for example, a main storage area) that stores at least game state information indicating that the game state information is controlled to the third game state and the number-of-games information executed in the third game state (for example, a low certainty time short game state). Area of F1A0 to F1AF of RAM 103),
Has
The information erasing means,
When the predetermined erasing operation is performed, a first erasing unit that erases both the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area (for example, the processing of step S2426A). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Of the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area, only the information stored in the second storage area when the operation of changing the one setting value is performed. And a second erasing unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2424A).

According to the gaming machine of (6) above, the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the special symbol is a normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) that is more advantageous to the player than the table is included. As an aspect in which the specific table is more advantageous to the player than the normal table, for example, the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time is used as compared to the case where the expected value is determined using the normal table. A mode in which the value is larger when determined by That is, when the variable display pattern is determined using the specific table, a mode in which the variable display time is shorter than that when the variable display pattern is determined using the normal table is equivalent.

In addition, when the third game state (for example, low-probability time short game state) is controlled after the special game state ends, a predetermined number of games are played in this third game state (for example, low-probability time short game state). When is executed (for example, when the time saving game is digested), the first game state (for example, LG state) is entered.

Then, when the specified number of games are executed in the third game state and the game state shifts to the first game state, the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”). When the game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of the ceiling game number) in the first game state (for example, LG state), the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined using the specific table. Since a game state (for example, an HG state) is entered, it is possible to reduce the mental burden on the player even if the special game state is not controlled for a long time.

Here, the volatile storage means has at least a first storage area (for example, an area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) and a second storage area (for example, an area of F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103). The number-of-games information executed in one gaming state (for example, LG state) is stored in the first storage area (for example, the area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103), and the third gaming state (for example, low-probability-time short gaming state). In the second storage area (for example, the area of F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103), the game state information indicating that the game state information is controlled to and the number-of-games information executed in the third gaming state (for example, the low-probability time short gaming state) Memorized in. Then, when a predetermined erasing operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330) is performed as an operation for erasing or changing the information stored in the volatile storage unit, the first storage area (for example, the main storage area) Both the information stored in the F1B0 to F1BD areas of the RAM 103 and the information stored in the second storage area (for example, the F1A0 to F1AF areas of the main RAM 103) are erased or changed. On the other hand, when the operation of changing one set value is performed, the information stored in the first storage area (for example, the area of F1B0 to F1BD of the main RAM 103) is saved while the second storage area (for example, , The information stored in the areas F1A0 to F1AF of the main RAM 103) is deleted or changed. Therefore, when both the information stored in the first storage area and the information stored in the second storage area are erased or changed, the predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of ceiling games) is not set. The game in the first game state (for example, LG state) (that is, the first game state of the blue ceiling) will be started. On the other hand, when only the information stored in the second storage area is deleted or changed while the information stored in the first storage area is saved, a predetermined number of times (for example, 510 times of ceiling games) is set. The game in the first game state (for example, the LG state) can be started. Therefore, for example, the gaming machine manager is controlled to the third gaming state (for example, a low-probability time short gaming state) while leaving the number-of-games information executed in the first gaming state (for example, LG state). It is possible to erase or change the game state information and the game number information executed in the third game state (for example, the low-probability time short game state) or change one set value.

[4-15. 47th Gaming Machine]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a big hit determination is made when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and when a result of the big hit is displayed, a big hit game state advantageous to a player is controlled.

In this type of gaming machine, the normal gaming state becomes monotonous until it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, and moreover, there is a tendency that the player's stress accumulates if the state where no game ball is won at the starting opening continues. Further, even if the big hit game state is controlled, if the big hit game state ends, a monotonous game has to be performed again, which may reduce the interest.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, apart from the big hit game state, there has been known a game machine that shifts to a game state advantageous to a player. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800 discloses a gaming machine in which a small hitting game is likely to be executed and the game machine is shifted to a highly accurate non-time saving state.

(15th subject)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-174800, the stress of the player is suppressed from being accumulated in the big hit game state and the highly accurate non-time saving state, but in the normal game state, the game ball is provided at the starting opening. When the state where no prize is won continues, the stress of the player is accumulated.

In order to solve the fifteenth problem, a forty-seventh gaming machine capable of reducing stress on the player is provided.

(1) The 47th gaming machine
A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area (for example, a passage gate switch 491) through which a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left hitting) can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the process of step S1912)
A variable display of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1913),
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, a movable control means (for example, the process of step S1914) that displaces a predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) in a specific manner is executed. Main CPU 101),
A special starting area (for example, the first starting opening 420) through which the game ball fired in the normal mode can pass,
Special lottery means capable of performing a special lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special starting area (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1219),
Variable display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the special lottery means, and the special symbol variable control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1013) that can derive the result of the special lottery as the result of the game, ,
Storage means (for example, the main ROM 102) that stores a plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1221) that determines the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the special symbol by using one of the plurality of tables,
As long as the game balls are continued to be fired in the normal mode, the special start area is set so that the game balls fired in the normal mode (for example, left-handed) pass through the special start area one by one at regular intervals. It is provided with a stable game realizing means (for example, a distribution member 800, a receiving member 810, a sending member 820, a closed region 836, and a guiding member 840) that can be guided to.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as long as the game ball is continuously fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed strike), the game ball shot in the normal manner is specially started one by one at regular intervals ( For example, since the game ball is configured to be guided so as to pass through the first starting opening 420), it is possible to ensure that the game is played a fixed number of times per unit time. In this way, it is possible to reduce the stress on the player by stably passing the game ball through the special starting area.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special starting area is
A first special starting area (for example, a first starting opening switch 421) configured so that the gaming ball is always passed when the gaming ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area.
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific ordinary lottery result is derived, a second special starting area (eg, a game ball launched in the normal mode) is easily passed. , A second starting opening switch 441),
Have
The special lottery means,
A first special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball having passed through the first special start area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is NO,
A second special lottery means (for example, step S1213) capable of performing a second special lottery including a specific result (for example, a small hit) in the lottery result based on the game ball passing through the second special starting area. Main CPU 101) which executes the process of step S1219 when the process is YES,
Have
The special symbol variable control means,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as a result of the game (for example, in step S1312) A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Based on the result of the second special lottery means, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the result of the second special lottery can be derived as the result of the game. Second special symbol variable control means (for example, step S1315). A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S1013 based on the result of the process,
Have
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
In the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed (for example, a period in which the second starting winning combination is determined to be valid) occurs. A normal table with a relatively small expected value (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”),
A specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table in the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode. ,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determinable using the specific table based on the satisfaction of a specific condition.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed, the second No special lottery. That is, the second special extraction is executed when the game ball passes through the second special starting area in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed. The second special starting area facilitates passage of a game ball when a predetermined movable member (for example, blade member 4622) is displaced in a specific mode. Further, in the plurality of tables used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol, among the periods in which the predetermined movable member (for example, the blade member 4622) is displaced in the specific mode, A regular table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) with a relatively small expected value that causes a specific period in which the first special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, a period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid) ) And a specific table (for example, fluctuation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”) in which an expected value during which a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting mouth prize is determined to be valid) occurs is larger than the normal table. include. Then, the specific condition is satisfied, the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the second special lottery is performed, and the result is the specific result (for example, small hit). Then, it becomes easy for the game ball to pass through the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521), and the prize is easily awarded.

Therefore, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined by using the specific table (for example, the variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”), it is determined that the specific period (for example, the second starting mouth winning is effective). The expected value of the second special prize becomes larger than that of the normal table (for example, the fluctuation pattern table number “3”), and the second special during the specific period (for example, the period when it is determined that the second starting mouth winning is valid). When the game ball passes through the starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) and the result of the second special lottery is the specific result (for example, small hit), the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) ), the game ball can easily pass, and the prize can be easily awarded. Thereby, even if it is not controlled to a special game state such as the conventional big hit game state, when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the specific table, it is easy to give a prize, so it is monotonous. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
After one game ball has passed to the first special starting area, after a time longer than the variable display time of the shortest variable display pattern with the shortest variable display time of the first special symbol in the normal table has passed. In addition, a holding suppression means (for example, a delivery member 820) configured to pass another game ball to the first special starting area is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), after one gaming ball passes through the first special starting area (for example, the first starting opening switch 421), the normal table (for example, fluctuation pattern table number “3”) Among them, after a time longer than the variable display time of the shortest variable display pattern of the shortest variable display pattern of the shortest variable display time of the first special symbol, another game ball is moved to the first special starting area (for example, the first starting opening switch 421). ) Is configured to pass. Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol can be prevented from being continuously performed, and while the game ball is stably supplied to the first special starting area, the variable display of the first special symbol causes a specific period (for example, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second starting opening winning period is not valid).

(4) In the gaming machine described in (2) or (3) above,
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed It is characterized in that the second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas.

According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441), the starting information is not reserved and at least the first special symbol is variable. The second special lottery is performed only when the game ball passes through the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441) in the state where the display is not performed. That is, even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the second special lottery is not always performed, but at least the second special starting area is not displayed in a variable display of the first special symbol (for example, Only when the game ball passes through the second starting opening switch 441), a specific result (for example, a small hit) can be obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency of facilitating passage of the game ball to the specific winning area (for example, the small hit winning opening switch 521) from being unduly increased, and to reduce the interest in the gaming state which tends to be monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. ..

According to the gaming machine of the above (5), when the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is determined using the normal table (for example, the variation pattern table number “3”), the first special symbol is displayed for almost the entire period. Since the variable display is performed, it is difficult for a specific period (for example, a period in which the second starting opening prize is determined to be valid) to occur, and the game ball is set in the second special starting area (for example, the second starting opening switch 441). Even if it passes, the second special lottery is difficult to be held. Therefore, the variable display pattern of the first special symbol is changed only when the ratio is determined using the normal table and the determination is performed using the specific table (for example, variation pattern table numbers “4” to “6”). Thus, it is possible to easily change the appearance ratio of the specific result (for example, a small hit).

According to the forty-seventh gaming machine of the present invention having the above structure, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing stress on the player.

In addition, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the embodiments when applied to a pachinko gaming machine have been described, but all the inventions described in the present specification are within the scope not departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines, game machines, slot machines and all other game machines.

16 liquid crystal display device 24 speaker 49 passage gate 73 first special symbol display portion 74 second special symbol display portion 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 main RAM
201 Sub CPU
420 1st starting opening 440 2nd starting opening 560 Winning hole for small hits

Claims (4)

A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A normal starting area through which a game ball launched in a normal manner can pass,
An ordinary lottery means capable of performing an ordinary lottery based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the ordinary starting area,
A variable display of the normal symbol based on the result of the normal lottery, and a normal symbol variable control means for deriving the result of the normal lottery,
Based on the fact that a specific ordinary lottery result has been derived as a result of the ordinary lottery, movable control means for displacing a predetermined movable member in a specific manner,
A first special starting area configured so that the game ball is always passed when the game ball launched in the normal mode passes through the normal starting area,
First special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result in a lottery result based on that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as the result of the game,
When the predetermined movable member is displaced to the specific mode based on the fact that the specific normal lottery result is derived, a second special starting area that facilitates passage of a game ball launched in the normal mode,
Second special lottery means capable of performing a second special lottery including the specific result in the lottery result based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area.
A second special symbol variable control means capable of variably displaying the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery means and deriving the result of the second special lottery as the result of the game,
Storage means for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using one of the plurality of tables,
A specific winning area that facilitates passage of a game ball based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery,
Prize giving means for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the second special lottery is not performed, and at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. It is configured so that the second special lottery can be performed when a game ball passes through the second special starting area in the state where
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
Of the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, a normal table having a relatively small expected value during a specific period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed,
A specific table in which the expected value of the specific period is larger than the normal table during the period in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode;
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be determined using the specific table based on the specific condition being satisfied. The second special lottery means,
Even if a game ball passes through the second special starting area, the starting information provided for the second special lottery is not held, and at least the first special symbol is not variably displayed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second special lottery is configured to be performed only when the game ball passes through the two special starting areas. The normal table is
Among the periods in which the predetermined movable member is displaced in the specific mode, it is configured to be determined as a variable display pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed over substantially the entire period. The gaming machine according to claim 1. A gaming machine in which the special symbols are variably displayed, and the result of one game is derived when the variably displayed special symbols are stopped,
A first special starting area through which the launched game ball can pass,
First special lottery means capable of performing a first special lottery including a specific result in a lottery result based on that the game ball has passed through the first special starting area,
Variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special lottery means, the first special symbol variable control means that can derive the result of the first special lottery as the result of the game,
A second special starting area through which the launched game ball can pass,
Second special lottery means capable of performing a second special lottery having a specific result with a higher probability than the first special lottery, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second special starting area,
A second special symbol variable control means capable of variably displaying the second special symbol based on the result of the second special lottery means and deriving the result of the second special lottery as the result of the game,
Storage means for storing a plurality of tables used for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern provided for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using one of the plurality of tables,
A specific winning area that facilitates passage of a game ball based on the fact that the specific result is derived as a result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery,
Prize giving means for giving a prize based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific winning area,
Equipped with
In the plurality of tables stored in the storage means,
A first table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively small,
A second table in which the expected value of the number of executions of variable display of special symbols per unit time is relatively large,
Is included at least,
The variable display pattern determining means,
The table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol, the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is the specific result. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be changeable based on the above.